JP2020074895A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of securing impartiality of a game by preventing execution of a variation in a second special pattern much more than expected.SOLUTION: At timing t1 as start timing of a time-shortening final variation, a time-shortening flag is reset to off and a time-shortening extension flag is set to on. After that, when a second holding storage number reaches the upper-limit number at timing t2, the time-shortening extension flag is reset to off and a time-shortening state (high-base control) is completed. After the time-shortening final variation is completed at timing t3, variation display of a second special pattern for the second holding storage number is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36-8

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  A gaming machine is proposed in which the hour / hour count value is subtracted after the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed, and the hour / hour flag is cleared to the off state if the updated hour / hour count value is 0 (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

JP, 2016-47333, A

  In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the symbol fixed stop time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the ordinary variable winning ball device (electric tulip) are not considered for the timing of turning off the time saving flag. Therefore, the normal variable winning ball device is opened in the next change after the end of the time saving state, and the game ball is won in the normal variable winning ball device, and after the end of the time saving state, the number of times is larger than the upper limit number of the hold. There was a possibility that the special map would be changed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine capable of ensuring the fairness of a game by preventing the variation of the second special figure from being executed more than expected. To aim.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
After performing variable display in the first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) and the second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display 8b), a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, It is a pachinko gaming machine 1) related to 73AK,
For the player, the time when the special state is controlled based on the variable display on the second variable display means is more than the time when the special state is controlled on the basis of the variable display on the first variable display means. Tends to be advantageous (for example, FIGS. 36-1 and 36-2),
Based on the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol being a predetermined result (for example, the normal symbol is a hit), the variable winning means for changing from the closed state to the open state in which the game medium is easier to win than the closed state (for example, Variable winning ball device 15),
On the basis of the game medium having entered the variable winning means, there is a holding storage means (for example, a second holding storage buffer) capable of storing information on the variable display of the second variable display means as second holding information,
It is possible to control to a special state (for example, a time saving state, a high base state) in which the variable winning device is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal state (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of step S170),
A special state ending means for ending the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS013, step 73AKS028, step 73AKS106),
The special state ending means,
The number of times of variable display in the special state is updated, and the special state can be ended when the number of times of variable display in the special state reaches the first number (for example, processing of step 73AKS007, step 73AKS028, step S149). With)
The number of special states in the special state is updated, and the special state can be terminated when the number of special states in the special state reaches the second number (for example, the process of step 73AKS025 is executed). ,
As the number of times of variable display in the special state, the number of times of variable display in the first variable display means and the second variable display means is updated (for example, the processing of step 73AKS002 and step S143 is executed),
As the number of times of the special state in the special state, the second variable display means of the special state based on the variable display on the second variable display means and the special state based on the variable display on the first variable display means The number of times of the special state based on the variable display in (1) is updated (for example, the processes of step 73AKS022 and step 73AKS023 are executed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control the special state.

(2) Further, in order to achieve the above object, another gaming machine according to the present invention is
The first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 8a) and the second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 8b) are capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to 73AK). ), And
The variable display on the second variable display means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the variable display on the first variable display means (eg, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
A variable winning device that changes from a closed state to an open state in which the game medium is easier to win than the closed state based on that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol is a predetermined result (for example, the normal symbol is a hit) (for example, Variable winning ball device 15),
Hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second variable display means as second hold information based on the entry of the game medium into the variable winning device.
Special state control means (for example, CPU 56 that executes the process of step S170) capable of controlling the special state (for example, a time saving state, a high base state) in which the variable winning device is more likely to be opened than in the normal state;
A special state ending means for ending the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS013, step 73AKS028, step 73AKS106),
The special state ending means is provided on condition that the number of the second holding information stored in the holding storage means has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4 which is an upper limit number) in the variable display of the last time in the special state. The special state may be terminated (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS012, step 73AKS013, step 73AKS105, and step 73AKS106).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means, which is advantageous in the number of times larger than the upper limit number of the second hold information after the special state ends, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the number of the second holding information stored in the holding storage means does not reach the predetermined number in the final variable display in the special state, the special state ending unit is configured to perform the special display at the end of the variable display. The state may be ended (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS028 and step S149).
With such a configuration, fairness of the game can be ensured.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (2) above,
When the special state is controlled, the first flag (for example, a time saving flag) is turned on, and in the final variable display in the special state, the first flag is turned off and the second flag is set when the variable display is started. (For example, a time saving extension flag) is turned on, and the second flag is turned off when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS012 and step 73AKS013).
The special state ending means may end the special state when the second flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means, which is advantageous in the number of times larger than the upper limit number of the second hold information after the special state ends, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
A flag management that turns on a first flag (for example, a time saving flag) when controlled to the special state, and turns off the first flag when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the final variable display in the special state. Means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS105 and step 73AKS106),
The special state ending means may end the special state when the first flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means, which is advantageous in the number of times larger than the upper limit number of the second hold information after the special state ends, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An external signal sending unit (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of S29) that sends out a signal (for example, a time saving signal) indicating the special state to the outside is provided.
The external signal transmitting means may be capable of transmitting a signal indicating the special state for a predetermined period even after the end of the special state (for example, FIG. 36-8).
With such a configuration, it is possible for the external device to preferably recognize the continuous advantageous state.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a figure which shows a hit classification table. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit determination table and a big hit type determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a variation example of the first and second special symbols in the first time saving state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is the flowchart which shows the special design process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows a small hit opening pretreatment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is the flowchart which shows production control main processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a display screen diagram of an effect display device showing an effect image of a round suggestion effect. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device showing the effect image of the pending continuous notification effect. It is a timing chart of a suspension consecutive notification effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the data table used when selecting the production mode of round number suggestive production. It is an explanatory view showing a pending continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the reservation consecutive / round number suggestion production selection processing. It is a flowchart showing a round number suggesting effect process. It is a flow chart which shows the reservation consecutive notice production 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows a reservation continuous information production second process. It is the display screen figure of the production display which shows the production image of specific production. It is a timing chart of specific production. It is a flow chart which shows specific production 1st processing. It is a flowchart showing a specific effect second process. It is a display screen diagram of an effect display device showing a first display control example of the number of remaining hours saved. It is a flowchart which shows the process performed by the effect control microcomputer in order to perform the effect display of the remaining number of time saving shown in FIG. It is a display screen diagram of an effect display device showing a second display control example of the remaining number of hours saved. It is a flowchart which shows the process performed by the effect control microcomputer in order to perform the effect display of the remaining number of time reductions shown in FIG. FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of a display area in the vicinity of a remaining time reduction display section showing an example of a remaining time reduction update lock display control. It is a display screen diagram of the effect display device showing a specific notification example. It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in a main board (game control board). It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is an explanatory view showing a hit type table and a big hit type determination table. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion notification and arrival notification. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the number of reservations and a notification mode. It is a figure which shows the timing chart during time saving when there is no special 1 reservation. It is a figure which shows the aspect of a variable display device etc. in the area A, B, and achievement production. It is a figure which shows a timing chart during a time saving when there is special 1 reservation. It is a figure which shows a timing chart during time saving when the right reel is not stopped. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows processing during the 1st time saving time change. It is a flowchart showing a small hit ending process. It is a flow chart which shows time saving fluctuation processing. It is a figure which shows the hit classification table of the characteristic part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the hit probability of the characteristic part 33AK, and a hit classification determination ratio. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of time saving final change. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is a figure which shows the production | generation aspect of the notification of winning a prize. It is a flowchart showing a time saving final variation effect process. It is a timing chart in the time saving final variation of the characteristic part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement which concerns on the characteristic part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement which concerns on the characteristic part 33AK. It is a figure which shows the hit classification table of the characteristic part 73AK. It is a figure which shows the hit probability of the characteristic part 73AK, and a hit classification determination ratio. It is a timing chart showing an opening mode of the V winning area in the small hit of the characteristic portion 73AK. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start of the characteristic part 73AK. It is a flow chart which shows the time saving end judgment processing of the characteristic part 73AK. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol stop processing of feature section 73AK. It is a figure which shows the example of production | presentation operation | movement which concerns on the characteristic part 73AK. It is a timing chart until the end of the time saving state of the characteristic portion 73AK. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving end determination processing of the modification of the characteristic part 73AK.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine.

  FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, a game frame (not shown) attached to the inside of the outer frame so that the game frame can be opened and closed, and a game frame that can be opened and closed. And a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape.

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the bottom of the hitting ball supply tray 3, when a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls as a game medium that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supplying tray 3 and a game ball as a game medium are shot as a hit ball from a hitting ball launching device. A hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for operation is provided. At the back of the glass door frame 2, a game board 6 having a game area 7 in which the driven game balls can flow down is detachably attached. A large number of game nails are planted in the game area 7. In the game area 7, some of the game nails are shown. The hitting ball launching device is driven by a launching motor, and the force (firing strength) for hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the rotational operation position of the hitting ball operation handle 5. Thereby, the player can shoot a game ball aiming at a desired place in the game area 7.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. In the game area 7, the first path of the downflow path along which the game ball flows down is mainly provided in an area on the left side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front, and the first down path of the downflow path along which the game ball flows down. A second route different from the one route is mainly provided in the area on the right side of the effect display device 9 when viewed from the front.

  Hitting a game ball in the left side area (left side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to make the game ball flow down to the first path is called left hitting. Driving the game ball into the right side area (right side game area) of the effect display device 9 in order to make the game ball flow down to the second path is called right hitting. The first route is a route that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side of the game area 7, and thus may be called a left hitting route. Further, the second route may be called a right-handed route because the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area 7.

  In addition, the first route and the second route may be configured by different routes, or may be a partially shared route. The left game area and the right game area may be divided, for example, by the end surface of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, the arrangement of the game nails, or the like.

  When the ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball hitting handle 5 and is driven into the game area 7, the game ball is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example, when it is guided to the left game area. As a result, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide to the right game area. Further, when the game ball is guided to the right game area, for example, by being guided along the arrangement of the game nails, it becomes impossible or difficult to guide the player to the left game area.

  A first starting winning opening 13 is provided as a structure into which a game ball hit in the left game area of the game area 7 can enter. The first start winning opening 13 is arranged below the effect display device 9. The first starting winning opening 13 is provided with a first starting winning opening switch 13a as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered.

  The gate 32, the variable winning ball device 15, and the V determination winning device 87 are provided as a structure into which a game ball hit in the right game area of the game area 7 can enter. The variable winning ball device 15 has a second starting winning hole 14 in which a game ball can be won. Further, as a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered each, a gate switch 32a inside the gate 32, a second start winning opening switch 14a inside the second starting winning opening 14, a V determination winning device Inside the 87, a V winning switch 87a, a V judging winning switch 15a and a V judging discharging switch 15b are provided respectively. Hereinafter, the game ball winning (entering) the first starting winning opening 13 is also referred to as a first starting winning prize, and the game ball winning (entering) the second starting winning opening 14 is also referred to as a second starting winning prize.

  The first start winning opening 13 is a game ball (starting winning ball) enters (winning prize) as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the first special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) Possible winning structure. The second starting winning opening 14 is a gaming ball (starting winning ball) entering (winning prize) as a starting winning device for starting the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol as the variable display means (variable display means). ) Possible winning structure.

  The gate 32 is a gate structure through which a game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the normal symbol is variably displayed. Ordinary symbols will be described later. In the left game area, game nails are planted so that the game balls are guided to the first start prize hole 13 of the prize hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the first start winning opening 13, the player may hit the game ball to the left. Further, in the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game balls are guided to the second starting winning opening 14 and the gate 32 of the winning opening structure. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14 and the gate 32, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

  It should be noted that it is possible to allow the game balls that have been hit in the right game area to enter the first start winning hole 13, but from the viewpoint of playability, that possibility is hit in the left game area. It is desirable to make it extremely low compared to the possibility that game balls will enter them. On the contrary, it may be possible that the game ball hit in the left game area enters the gate 32 and the second starting winning opening 14, but from the viewpoint of playability, the possibility is right. It is desirable to make it extremely low in comparison with the possibility that the game balls hit in the game area enter them.

  The V determination winning device 87 is a device for determining a V winning of a game ball, which is a condition for generating a big hit when a small hit occurs.

  The V determination winning device 87 is formed of a transparent member, and it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball passes through the inside. The V-judgment winning device 87 has a width at the top that allows game balls to pass through in the front-rear direction, and has walls on both sides (front side and back side) of a passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left-right direction. A portion is provided, and a guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed along the path. At the center of the conduit, when a small hit occurs, for a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds × 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) × 9 times + ending period 1 second) By repeating opening and closing, an operating port is formed as an opening through which a total of about 10 or more game balls can be won within a predetermined period of opening. The passage of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87 is provided with a plurality of protrusions as deceleration means for decelerating the guided game ball in such a manner that a plurality of protrusions alternately project on both sides of the wall portion, so that when the player hits the ball to the right. , V determination winning device 87 has a structure in which a game ball slowly flows (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in a passage above an operation port.

  In the small hitting game state, until the entry of 10 game balls into the V determination winning device 87 is detected, or until a predetermined period elapses, the V determination winning device 87 is operated for a relatively long period of time. The opening control is executed. During such an open control period, the number of rounds suggestive effect shown in FIG. 20 and the continuous holding notification effect shown in FIG. 21 described later are provided so that the player does not feel it if the open control is extended. It is possible to execute such a particular effect. In the V-judgment winning device 87, a portion of the guideway where the operation port is not formed forms a fixed passage called a fixed portion 873. A movable portion 872 is provided at a position where the actuating port can be opened and closed so as to move forward and backward on the actuating port.

  The movable portion 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close the operating port. In the state where the operating port is closed by the state of the movable portion 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable portion 872 and the fixed portion 873 as a guide path, and is guided from the right end to the left end on the guide path and falls from the left end. To do. In the state in which the operating port is opened due to the operating state of the movable portion 872, the operating port opens in the taxiway, so that the game ball guided to the taxiway can fall from the operating port into the V determination prize winning device 87. Become.

  Inside the V-judgment winning device 87 (operating port), a V-winning region 870 as a specific region is located at the center of the bottom of the V-judging winning device 87 in the left-right direction as a winning region in which game balls that have entered from the operating port can win. Further, an inclined path 871 is provided which is provided in the section and guides all of the game balls that have entered from the operation opening onto the V winning area 870 by an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning opening into which a game ball can enter, and can guide the gaming ball entering from the V winning hole downward.

  At the uppermost end of the V winning area (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, there is provided a plate-like opening / closing member (not shown) capable of switching the V winning area 870 between an open state and a closed state. There is. The opening / closing member is driven by the solenoid 24, and can be moved forward / backward to open / close the V winning opening. In the state where the V winning opening is opened due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 can fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, in a state where the V winning opening is closed due to the state of the opening / closing member, the game ball guided on the V winning area 870 passes over the opening / closing member and opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870. In the winning ball area (not shown) in which the game can be guided downward, the player can drop the game.

  Specifically, the V prize area 870 of the V determination prize device 87 is basically in an open state, and one gaming ball is in the small hitting game state in which the operation opening of the V determination prize device 87 is opened. When the player enters the V winning area 870 and wins the prize, the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a provided in the V winning area 870. In the small hitting game state, when one game ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a, the opening / closing member is controlled to be in the closed state, and the game ball guided thereafter on the V winning region 870 is within the winning ball region. Will enter. The game ball that has entered the winning ball area is detected by the V determination winning switch 15b provided in the winning ball area. As a result, one gaming ball is detected by the V winning switch 15a, and subsequent gaming balls are detected by the V determining winning switch 15b.

  When the total number of balls detected by the V winning switch 15a and the V judging winning switch 15b reaches 10, the operating port is closed and the game ball enters in the V determination winning device 87 opened in the small hitting game state. Impossible. The V winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to join together at the lower side, and the gaming ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 through the joined discharge passage has a predetermined size inside the game board 6. It is discharged to the discharge path. The discharge passage is provided with a V determination discharge switch capable of detecting the discharged game balls, and all the game balls discharged by the switch are detected.

  When a small hit occurs and the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened, the game ball is won in the V winning area 870 and the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a during a predetermined effective period. , The jackpot occurrence condition is established, and the jackpot is controlled to a gaming state. The winning of the game ball in such a V winning area 870 is called a V winning. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, during the period in which the small hit occurs and the working opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as described above, a total of about 10 game balls are averaged without requiring a special operation. Has a structural design and control design so that it can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, and when a game ball can enter the V-judging winning device 87, the gaming ball is always (100%) V-winning area. The structural design is designed to enter 870. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a small hit occurs, a right-handing promotion notification for instructing a right-handing is executed so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-judgment winning device 87. It

  Therefore, when a small hit occurs, a right-handed stroke should be made except when the player does not shoot a game ball or when the player makes a left-handed hit during the opening period of the working opening of the V-judgment winning device 87. For example, a (100%) game ball will surely enter the V winning area 870 and a big hit will occur.

  In addition, in this embodiment, an example in which the V-decision winning apparatus 87 is provided with a deceleration structure for the game ball is shown. However, such a deceleration structure is not provided, and an operation port that allows the game ball to drop is provided in a part of the guide path of the game ball in the V determination winning device 87, and during the small hitting game state. In order to enter about 10 game balls into the V winning area 870, a configuration may be used in which the operating port is opened 10 times.

  A V lamp 875, which is a light emitting body made of an LED configured in a character shape of “V”, is provided on a part of the front surface of the V determination winning device 87. The V lamp 875 basically emits white light when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state. The V lamp 875 can basically emit light in white, but the emission color can be changed to blue, red, and iridescent depending on the game situation, such as when notifying the holding station. Is. Note that the V lamp 875 may be provided on the front surface portion or inside the V determination winning device 87 as long as it is visible to the player. Further, the V lamp 875 may be provided at a position different from the V determination winning device 87 (for example, a position in the vicinity of the V determination winning device 87).

  The variable winning ball device 15 is a variable winning ball device that changes between a state in which the player can enter the game ball (open state) and a state in which the player cannot enter the game ball (closed state). It is equipped with a tulip-shaped opening wing piece (a pair of left and right shapes) at the entrance, and a stopper member is provided above the opening wing piece to restrict the entry of game balls when the opening wing piece is closed. Has been. The open blade is driven by the solenoid 16. When the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a certain period (for example, 1 second), thereby changing from a disadvantageous state to the advantageous state for the player. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the prize, it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  In the right game area, game nails are planted so that the game balls are guided to the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to enter the game ball into the variable winning ball device 15 and the V determination winning device 87, the player may hit the game ball to the right.

  It should be noted that it may be possible that the game balls hit in the left game area may enter either the variable winning ball device 15 or the V determination winning device 87, but from the viewpoint of playability, It is desirable that the possibility is extremely low compared to the possibility that the game balls hit in the right game area enter them.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, there is provided an effect display device 9 capable of performing various effect displays such as effects corresponding to variable display of special symbols. On the right side of the effect display device 9 in the game area 7, as a variable display means for variably displaying special symbols as plural kinds of identification information capable of identifying each other, a first special symbol display for variably displaying the first special symbol. A device 8a and a second special symbol display device 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each are provided.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is composed of a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers and characters. The effect display device 9 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD). On the display screen of the effect display device 9, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, various images such as variable display of the effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each are displayed. A display area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area (symbol display area) that variably displays the effect symbols (also called ornamental symbols) for three decorations (for effect) of "left", "middle", and "right". Is formed.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b is controlled by the game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the production display is executed on the production display device 9 in accordance with the variation display, and the second on the second special symbol display device 8b. When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, if the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display device (variable display portion). I have something to do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 8a and 8b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device. When only one special symbol display device is provided, only one starting winning opening may be provided. Further, even when only one special symbol display is provided, two (a plurality of) starting winning openings are provided, and one special symbol display is provided when a game ball wins in any of the starting winning openings. The display may be changed. In addition, when two (or more) special symbol display devices are provided, one start winning opening is provided, and two special symbol display devices are variably displayed in a predetermined order (for example, variably displayed for each start winning a prize). Control may be performed such as switching the special symbol display device.

  Below the game area 7, a jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided. In the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a right-handed game ball is guided by a game nail planted in the right game area. In addition, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is configured so that the game ball does not enter from the left game area depending on the state of implantation of the game nail.

  The jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is provided with a jackpot opening whose front surface is covered with a rectangular door. When a jackpot occurs, the solenoid 21 causes the door to tilt forward about the bottom side, and the jackpot appears. (Open). Inside the big hit variable winning ball device 20, a count switch 23 for detecting a game ball that has entered is provided. To the jackpot variable winning ball device 20, a winning route is provided by a game nail or other structure so that the gaming ball can be won in the special winning opening only when the game ball is hit in the right game area. It is restricted. It should be noted that even when the game ball is hit in either the left game area or the right game area, the player may be allowed to win the special winning opening.

  When a game ball wins any one of the first start winning opening 13, the second starting winning opening 14, the big hit variable winning ball device 20, and the V determination winning device 87, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to each of them. Is paid out. The prize balls may be paid out even when the game balls pass through the gate 32. Further, with respect to at least one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the winning balls may not be paid out even if a gaming ball wins.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an outlet 26 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, four speakers 27 for producing a sound effect or a voice as a predetermined voice output are provided on the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

  The big hit, when the big hit design (big hit display result) is displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and when the big hit design (big hit display result) is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, respectively Occurs in. When it is determined to be a big hit by lottery based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning hole 13, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a. When it is determined to be a big hit by lottery based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14, the big hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b.

  The big hit also occurs when the game ball that has entered when the working hole of the V determination winning device 87 is open due to the small hit game state entering the V winning area 870. Hereinafter, the game ball entering the V winning area 870 and detected by the V winning switch 87a is referred to as a V winning. The small hit is a hit in which the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 is opened as a predetermined value addition, and a big hit can be generated on condition of the V winning. In the V determination winning device 87, the game state in which the operating opening is opened is called a "small hitting game state". And, in the small hitting game state, the big hit which is generated on the basis of the fact that the game ball wins V is called “the big hit via the small hit”. On the other hand, based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b, the big hit game state is called "big hit by special symbol".

  The big hit game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player for giving a predetermined value, and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 repeats an open state and a closed state for a predetermined number of times to perform repeated continuation control. In the repeated continuation control, the state where the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened (the big winning opening is opened) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

  In the big hit game state, after the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened, a predetermined end condition of the open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) The closed condition is established in response to the satisfaction of the opening end condition) that the winning balls of (1) have been generated. Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition) that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, a game ball is After having passed through the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 as the starting winning area (including winning), the start condition of the variable display (for example, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) Display is not being executed, and started based on the fact that the jackpot game is not being executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) has elapsed, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. It should be noted that passing a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the gaming ball has entered (winning) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display).

  Further, with regard to the variable display in which the starting condition has not been established yet even though the game ball has entered the starting area such as the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, within a predetermined upper limit number. Storing the information about the variable display for which the start condition has not been established yet is called pending storage. Further, such a term "reserved storage" is also used to indicate (specify) information stored in a reserved manner. The reserved memory is also called a start memory or a start winning memory.

  Regarding the first special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the first reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 13. For the second special symbol, the variable display is executed based on the second reserved memory as the reserved memory based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening 14. When a big hit occurs in the state where such a first holding memory or a second holding memory exists, the holding memory that existed before the big hit occurrence is maintained as it is, and the variable display is displayed after the end of the big hit gaming state. Used for.

  When the second starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the second starting winning is executed preferentially even if the first starting winning is held and stored. To be done. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Above the first special symbol display 8b and the second special symbol display 8b, the second consisting of one display that displays the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second number of reserved memories. A special symbol hold storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b lights up the second special symbol hold memory indicator 18b every time there is an effective start winning, and each time the variable display on the second special symbol indicator 8b is started, The second special symbol reservation storage display 18b is turned off.

  Further above the second special symbol reserved memory display 18b, the first special symbol reserved memory display consisting of four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number. A container 18a is provided. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a increases the number of the indicator which lights up whenever there is an effective starting winning a prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 8a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, there is provided a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays ordinary symbols that can be identified. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 10 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can variably display numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display device 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small-sized display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started. If the stop symbol in the normal symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7"), it becomes a hit, and the variable winning ball device 15 is limited to a predetermined time from a closed state which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to the open state, which is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 10, there is provided a normal symbol reservation storage display device 41 having a display section with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32, the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 122 that can be held by a player and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left and right). A predetermined instruction operation is performed on the stick controller 122 by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, left hand). A trigger button 125 (see FIG. 3) capable of operating is provided, and inside the operating rod of the stick controller 122, a trigger sensor 121 (see FIG. 3) that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as push-pull operation with respect to the trigger button 125. Is built in. Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate and the like below the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  In the member forming the hitting ball supply tray (upper tray) 3, the player performs a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper tray body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) that detects an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 is provided inside the main body of the upper plate and the like at the installation position of the push button 120.

  In the pachinko game machine 1, depending on the game situation, the player shoots a game ball so that "left hitting" which aims at the left game area and "right hitting" which aims at the right game area are used differently, so that the change occurs. The game state and the production state are controlled so that a rich game can be enjoyed. The flow of the game after the player starts the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described below.

  When the player sits in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starts the game for the first time, the player first plays the game ball so that the game ball is won in the first start winning slot 13 by left-handed hitting. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and when the display result is a big hit (a big hit by the special symbol), the game is aimed at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 which is switched from left hitting to right hitting. .. After the jackpot game state is over, a right-handing promotion notification is given on the screen of the effect display device 9 to urge the player to play the game by right-handing. Specifically, a message such as "Aim right" is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9.

  During the big hit game state, a game is carried out in which the open big hit variable winning ball device 20 is aimed by hitting it to the right. During the big hit game state, a right-handed promotion notification is given. After the jackpot gaming state is over, if a time saving state described later is reached, the game is continued by hitting the right side. After the jackpot game is over, a time saving notification is made on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the time saving state is started if the time saving state has been entered. In addition, during the time saving state, right-handing promotion notification is also performed. If it does not become a time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends, the right-handed promotion notification executed during the jackpot gaming state ends, so that the right-handed ball is switched to the left-handed ball and the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13. Play the game as you would. When the time saving state is not reached, a left-handing promotion notification (also referred to as left-handing notification) is provided on the screen of the effect display device 9 to prompt the player to return to left-handing and play the game. May be.

  During the time saving state after the big hit game ends, the game is performed by aiming at the variable winning ball device 15 having the second starting winning opening 14 by right-handing. When the game ball wins the second start winning hole 14, and the display result is a big hit (a big hit due to a special symbol), a game is performed aiming at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 while right-handed. Also, if a game ball wins the second start winning port 14 and the display result is a small hit display result, the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in the small hit game state, so V is left right-handed. A game is played aiming at the determination winning device 87. At the start of the small hitting game state, a small hitting start notification for notifying that the small hitting game state is started on the screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. In addition, when it is controlled to the small hitting game state, it is executed at a specific timing (before the opening of the working hole of the V determination winning device 87 according to the small hitting, which will be described later depending on the game situation). At the start timing of the hit display or at a predetermined timing before the small hit display is executed, the right-handing promotion notification is also given.

  When the working hole of the V determination prize winning device 87 is in the open state due to the small hitting game state, the game ball falls inside the V judging prize winning device 87 from the working aperture, enters the V winning region 870, and is detected. When a V winning occurs, a big hit via a small hit occurs. When a V prize is generated, V prize notification for notifying that the V prize has been generated is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9. Further, when the small hit game state ends, a small hit end notification is made on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify that the small hit game state has ended. After the small hit, the big hit game state is entered and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened. Therefore, the player aims at the big hit variable winning ball device 20 and plays the game.

  In addition, when a game is aimed at the V determination winning device 87 in the small hitting game state, the game ball does not enter the V winning region 870 but enters a non-specific region (not shown) other than the V winning region 870. No big hits. In this way, when the V winning is not generated during the small hitting game state, the V winning failure notification for notifying that the V winning has failed is performed on the screen of the effect display device 9. Further, at the end of the small hitting game state, a small hitting end notification for notifying that the small hitting game state has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9 is performed. Then, after the small hitting game state is over, when the time saving state is continued, the player continues to hit the variable winning ball device 15 with the right hit and play the game. When the time saving state ends, the game is switched from right-handed to left-handed and the game is performed so that the game ball is won in the first start winning opening 13. At the end of the time saving state, a time saving end notification for notifying that the time saving has ended on the screen of the effect display device 9 and a left hitting promotion notification for prompting the player to return to left hitting and play a game are performed.

  FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a hit type table. The hit type table shows, for each type of hit, a big hit occurrence condition, a control state (game state) after the big hit, a number of times of opening (number of rounds) in the big hit, and an opening time of each round in the big hit. In this embodiment, as a type of big hit, symbol 15R hour / hour big hit, symbol 4R hour / hour big hit, small hit via 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R hour / hour big hit, and small hit via 5 ( 4) R time short and big hit. The number in the parentheses for the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened.

  The small hit occurs when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 14 provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and the display result of the second special symbol becomes the small hit symbol. Whether or not the display result of the special symbol is a small hit symbol is determined in advance by random number lottery (small symbol judgment of the special symbol). When a small hit occurs, the small hit game state is entered, and the operating port of the V determination winning device 87 is opened in an opening pattern in which the number of times of opening is 10 and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. The game control state (big hit probability, small hit probability, base described later) after the end of the small hit game state is the same as before the small hit. In the small hit, the prize balls are paid out to the game balls that have won the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87 during the small hit game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated during the small hitting game state, and about 30 winning balls can be paid out in accordance with the winning balls.

  When the game opening of the V determination winning device 87 is open, a game ball is won into the opening, and when the game ball enters the V winning area 870 inside the V determination winning device 87 (V winning), a big hit occurs. To do. Such a big hit via a small hit is called a big hit via a big hit as described above. Big hit via big hit includes small hit via 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R hour / short hit, and small hit via 5 (4) R hour / short hit. Be done. The 16 (15) R short-time big hit, which is linked so as to be a big hit, is called the first small hit. 9 (8) R A small hit linked so as to be a short-time big hit is called a second small hit. 5 (4) R The small hit that is tied so as to be a short-time big hit is called the third small hit.

  On the other hand, the big hit that is directly generated by the variable display of the special symbol without passing through the small hit is called a symbol big hit. As the symbol jackpot, there are a symbol 15R time-short jackpot and a symbol 4R time-short jackpot that are directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  In this way, as the big hit, the symbol big hit which is directly generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the small prize based on the variable display of the second special symbol are generated by the V prize. It includes a big hit and a big hit. Each big hit of the symbol big hit and the small hit via big hit is a big hit that is controlled in a time saving state after the end of the big hit game state, and is named as a time saving big hit. The advantageous state that is advantageous to the player in the present embodiment also includes opening of the jackpot variable winning ball device 20.

  Here, the time saving state will be described. The time saving state is an example of a special game state (advantageous state) advantageous to the player. The time saving state is a control state in which the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol (effect symbol) is shorter than the non-time saving state (normal state). In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so when the time saving state is reached, an effective starting winning is likely to occur and a jackpot game may be performed. Increase.

  In the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being in the open state, the frequency of game balls entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased to facilitate the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 ( It is controlled to a high base state, which makes it highly approachable and highly frequent.

  Here, the "base" is the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls in accordance with the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. The "high base state" is a state where active control is performed to increase this ratio. On the other hand, the state where such control is not performed is the "low base state". Such control is realized, for example, as control for increasing the occurrence of a start winning that triggers the start of variation of the special symbol. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 (so-called electric tulip) is opened to the variable winning ball device by increasing the opening frequency or the number of times of opening, or lengthening the opening time once. It can be realized as a control that facilitates winning. Such control is also referred to as "electrical Chu support control". In other words, the high base state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 that is the trigger for the fluctuation of the special symbol to be in the open state, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable winning ball device 15 is increased and variable. This is a control state in which the winning of the winning ball device 15 is facilitated (increased entry, increased frequency). "Den Chu support control" is generally called by the abbreviation "Den support", and the abbreviation "Den support" may also be used in this embodiment.

  Further, the high base control (electrical Chu support control) will be described in detail. As a high base control (electricity Chu support control), the control to display and display the display result early by shortening the variation time of the ordinary symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time when the display result is derived and displayed) (normal symbol shortening) Control), control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the normal symbol will be a winning symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 (ordinary electric accessory) (release time extension control), and , The control for increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device is opened (the number of times of opening increase control) is used as a trigger for changing the special symbol. When such control is performed, the time ratio in which the variable winning ball device that is the trigger for changing the special symbol is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so the game ball is started. It becomes easy to win the prize (the execution condition of the variable display on the special symbol display devices 8a, 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established).

  Further, the symbol 15R hour-short jackpot is a jackpot in which the special winning opening is opened 15 times (15R). The symbol 4R hour-long jackpot is a jackpot in which the special winning opening is opened four times (4R). In the case of 16 (15) R short-time big hit via small hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 15 times (15R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device is opened for 16 rounds, but the number of times the big winning opening is actually opened is 15, and the player is a big hit similar to the symbol 15R short-time big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel like a type. In the case of a 9 (8) R short-time big hit via small hit, the big winning opening is opened 8 times (8R) after the V judgment winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times) Is. In the case of 5 (4) R hour / hour / big hit via small hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened four times (4R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device is opened for 5 rounds, but the number of big winning openings is practically 4 times, and the player is a big hit similar to the symbol 4R short-time big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel like a type.

  The time saving state after the symbol 4R time-short and big hit is the ending condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1, and the ending condition that the total number of the variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times. Two end states are set. In this way, the number of times of end condition of the time saving that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 is that the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. Has been set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is once is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, may generate a big hit via a small hit. There are times.

  The number of times of the time saving ending condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 is set for the following reason. In the case of symbol 4R time saving big hit, basically, the time saving state (including the electric support state) is continued until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, but in order to variably display the second special symbol, It is necessary to make a right hit to enter the game ball into the gate 32 to open the variable winning ball device 15 and open the variable winning ball device 15 in that state. There is a case where it takes time to win a game ball, and the first special symbol that has been stored on hold is variably displayed first.

  Therefore, the end condition that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 times is a big hit immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Even if the variation display of the first special symbol due to the pending storage based on the first start winning prize that can be stored up to four before the game state is started, the second special symbol that is easily determined as a jackpot that is advantageous to the player 1 This is a condition for surely enabling variable display of batches. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol due to the hold memory based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, and thus the jackpot which is advantageous to the player in the time saving state is likely to be determined. It can be prevented that the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed.

  After the big hit other than the symbol 4R short-time big hit, the ending condition that the variable display frequency of the second special symbol is 7 times, and the ending condition that the total number of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times as the end condition of the time saving state is set in consideration that the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 4R time short and big hit, may generate a big hit via a small hit. Is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be focused on the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be increased.

  In addition, the end condition that the total number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, a big hit. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol due to the reserved memory based on the first starting prize that can be stored up to four before the game state is started, the second special symbol that is easy to be decided as a jackpot advantageous to the player 7 This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of times of fluctuation can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol due to the hold storage based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, and thus the jackpot which is advantageous to the player in the time saving state is likely to be determined. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

  In this embodiment, in the low base state which is the normal state, the first start winning port 13 is provided so that the winning can be made from the first route, so it is better if the game ball flows down the first route. It is more advantageous for the player in terms of starting winning than the game ball flowing down the two routes. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big hit game state, the big hit variable winning ball device 20 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second route, so that the game ball flowing down the second route is the first route. It is more advantageous for the player in winning the big hit than for the game ball to flow down. Further, in a specific state such as a small hit game state, the V determination winning device 87 that is opened is provided so as to be able to win from the second route, so that the game ball flowing down the second route is the first route. It is more advantageous to the player in that a big hit occurs than when the game ball flows down.

  In addition to the comparison of such advantages, for example, another winning opening (for example, another variable winning opening (whether for starting winning or non-starting winning) may be the first route. It is provided in the and the second route, in the low base state as a normal state, the first route is easier to win the variable winning port than the second route, the high base state, the big hit game state, and the small In other states such as the winning game state, the second route is easier to win the variable winning opening than the first route, from another viewpoint, in the normal state, the game medium is the first route. A configuration may be adopted in which it is advantageous for the player to flow down, and it is advantageous for the player for the game medium to flow down the second path in other game states.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 3 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing programs for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the programs, and an I / O port section. Including 57. The game control microcomputer 560 is a 1-chip microcomputer in which the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least data according to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 54, so that hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used for generating a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a small hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and is generated at random timing. Based on the fact that the numerical value data is read (extracted) at the time of starting winning, a random number generating function is provided in which the numerical value data read becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503.

  Moreover, the detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the V winning switch 87a, the V determination winning switch 15a, and the V determination discharging switch 15b are used for game control. The input driver circuit 58 that supplies the microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15, the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the big hit variable winning ball device 20, the solenoid 22 for opening and closing the V determination winning device 87 (movable part 872), and the V winning determination winning device 87 ( The solenoid 22 for opening / closing the area 870 movable part 87), the solenoid 24 for opening / closing the V winning area 870 (opening / closing member), and the output circuit 59 driven according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31. Has been done. The payout control board 37 controls the payout of the payout by controlling the ball payout device 97.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b that displays the special symbol in a variable manner, the normal symbol display device 10 that displays the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, the first special symbol reserved storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

  The effect control board 80 is equipped with the effect control microcomputer 100, the ROM 102, the RAM 103, the VDP 109, the I / O port unit 105, and the like. The ROM 102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 102 and the RAM 103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 100. The VDP 109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 instructs the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77 that passes the signal only in one direction from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80. In addition to performing the variable display control of the effect display device 9, the display control of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side and the display control of the V lamp 875 are performed via the lamp driver board 35, and at the same time, the sound output board. Various performance controls are performed, such as controlling the sound output from the speaker 27 via 70.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the trigger button 125 of the stick controller 122, from the trigger sensor 121 via the I / O port unit 105. input. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation of the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the I / O port unit 105. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 sends an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the operation operation of the technician to the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the I / O port unit 105. Enter. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the I / O port unit 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 4, types of random numbers, update ranges, uses, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

  (1) Random 1: A random counter for determining whether to make a big hit and whether to make a small hit. Random 1 is updated one by one at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to 65535 which is the upper limit thereof, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 2: Type of jackpot (type, symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot, symbol 4R hour / hour jackpot, small hit via 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot, via small hit 9 (8) R hour / hour jackpot, and via small hit 5 (4) R time short and big hits) and big hit symbols are determined (for big hit type determination, big hit symbols determination). (3) Random 3: The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination). (4) Random 4: The variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination). (5) Random 5: It is determined whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 6: Determine an initial value of Random 5 (for determining an initial value of Random 5).

  In this embodiment, as a big hit which is a specific game state, a symbol 15R hour short big hit, a symbol 4R hour short big hit, a small hit via 16 (15) R hour short big hit, a small hit via 9 (8) R hour short big hit, and a small hit It includes multiple types of via 5 (4) R hour / hour jackpot. Therefore, based on the value of the random number for random determination (random R), when it is determined to be a big hit, or when it is determined to be a small hit, based on the value of the random number for determining big hit type (random 1) Then, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types. However, in the case of a big hit via a small hit, the decided big hit becomes invalid unless a V winning is generated. Further, when the type of big hit is determined, at the same time, the big hit symbol is also determined based on the value of the random number for determining big hit type (random 1). Therefore, the random 1 is also a random number for jackpot symbol determination.

  Further, when it is determined that the type of small hit, it is determined at the same time the small hit symbol. Therefore, the random number 1 is also a random number for determining small hit symbols.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern is first included in the fluctuation pattern type determined by using the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2) to determine the fluctuation pattern type and using the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3). It decides on the fluctuation pattern. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns grouped according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

  In this embodiment, the variation patterns are classified into a normal variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type without reach and a reach variation pattern type which is a variation pattern type with reach.

  Such a variation pattern type is set in such a manner that the selection ratio of the variation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the time saving state when the display result is out of order. When, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time saving state is not set. For example, in the short-time state, in order to shorten the average time of the change time compared to when it is not in the short-time state, the change time of a predetermined change pattern is set shorter than when it is not the short time state, or the change of the most The variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected at a high rate, and even when the reach type is selected, the variation rate of the normal reach with the shortest variation time among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time saving state is not set.

  Further, such variation pattern types include a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs (for example, a variation pattern type in which an effect associated with the small hit is executed) and a small hit amount. Includes a change pattern type that cannot be selected (for example, a change pattern type in which an effect unrelated to a small hit is executed). Such a variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs is a variation pattern in which a specific effect is executed, and includes a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed. Therefore, when the variation pattern in which the predetermined suggestion effect regarding such a small hit is executed is executed, it is possible to raise the player's expectation. The variation pattern type that can be selected when it is a small hit can be selected both when it is a small hit and when it is not a small hit, and when it is a small hit it is better than when it is not a small hit. Is also set so that the selection rate becomes high. As a result, even if the variation pattern type that can be selected when a small hit occurs, it may occur when the small hit does not occur, so that the player can recognize in advance that a small hit will occur based on the type of the variation pattern that is executed. You can prevent it from happening. On the other hand, the variation pattern types that cannot be selected when a small hit is, for example, a variation pattern in which an effect unrelated to the small hit is suggested, which suggests that the small hit is a big hit directly. By making the selection impossible when the small hit occurs, the relation between the effect of the variation pattern and the display result can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, the variation pattern that can be selected when the small hit is set is set so that the variation pattern set to the specific variation time is selected based on the correspondence relationship with the opening control of the V determination winning device 87. .. If such a variation pattern in which a predetermined suggestion effect relating to the small hit is executed can be executed when the small hit occurs, the player's expectation for the small hit can be increased at the time of the variable display. it can. Furthermore, the player can easily cope with the game peculiar to the small hitting game state that it is necessary to enter the game ball into the V determination winning device 87 within a predetermined period in order to obtain the big hit. It is possible to make it difficult for the person to escape the advantageous state in which the game ball enters the V determination winning device 87.

  Further, the variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit occurs may not be limited to a specific variation time. In addition, the variation pattern that can be selected when a small hit occurs does not have to be the one in which a predetermined suggestion effect regarding the small hit is executed. Further, the variation patterns may be provided separately when the small hit occurs, when the small hit occurs, and when the big hit occurs. In addition, the variation patterns are not divided into the variation pattern when the small hit, the out-of-range, and the large hit, and the type of the variation pattern to be selected regardless of which variation display result is obtained. The ranges may be the same.

  Further, instead of setting the variation pattern type and the variation pattern separately and determining the variation pattern by a two-step lottery process, the variation pattern type is not provided and only the variation pattern determination random number is used to make a one-step The variation pattern may be determined by.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a first special drawing hit determination table, a second special drawing hit determination table, and various big hit type judgment tables. These tables are stored in the ROM 54.

  FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing a first special figure hitting determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for making a big hit determination for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The “probability” shown in FIG. 5 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

  FIG. 5B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special figure hitting determination table. The second special drawing hit determination table is a data table for making a big hit judgment and a small hit judgment for the second special symbol, and a big hit judgment value to be compared with random 1 and a small hit judgment value are set. It is a table. The upper row in FIG. 5 (B) is the big hit determination table portion, and the lower row in FIG. 5 (B) is the small hit determination table portion. The "probability" shown in the upper part of FIG. 5B shows the probability (ratio) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower part of FIG. 5B shows the probability (ratio) of a small hit.

  When the CPU 56 detects the start winning (first starting winning) to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second winning winning (starting winning) to the second starting winning opening 14, a random number is generated at a predetermined timing. The count value (random R) of the circuit 503 is extracted. For the first start prize, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special figure hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the jackpot is given for the first special symbol. To decide. Regarding the second start winning, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special figure hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot judgment values, the jackpot is given to the second special symbol. To decide. When the extracted value does not match any of the big hit judgment values, the extracted value is compared with the small hit judgment value set in the second special figure hit judgment table, and the extracted value is compared with any of the small hit judgment values. When they match, it is decided to make a small hit for the second special symbol. Deciding to make a small hit also means making a tentative decision to make a big hit via a small hit (described as a tentative decision because the big hit is not controlled unless a V winning occurs during the small hit). ..

  In addition, to determine whether to make a big hit, it is to make a decision to move to a big hit gaming state, the stop symbol by the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to the big hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not to do it. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to shift to the small hit game state, whether the stop symbol by the variable display of the second special symbol to be a small hit symbol It also means to decide whether or not.

  The first special symbol is set not to be determined as a small hit, but the first special symbol may be set to be determined as a small hit with a predetermined probability.

  5 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 5C is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 5 (D) is a second special figure jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

  In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5 (C), a numerical value that is compared with the value of random 1 for jackpot type determination, that is, "symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot" and "symbol 4R hour / hour jackpot" The jackpot determination value corresponding to each is set. In the second special symbol big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (D), a big hit determination value that is a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 1 and that corresponds to "Symbol 15R hour short big hit" is set.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5C and 5D, the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (a jackpot symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. For example, the determination value corresponding to "8R hourly short win" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the big hit symbol. The determination value corresponding to "15R short-time big hit" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the big hit symbol.

  Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 56 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of random 1 is matched as the jackpot type, and the value of random 1 is matched as the jackpot pattern. Determine the jackpot pattern that you made. Thereby, the big hit type and the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit type are simultaneously determined.

  The small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (E) is a numerical value that is compared with the value of Random 2 for big hit type determination. The jackpot determination values corresponding to each of the "via 9 (8) R hour / hour big hit" and the "small hit via 5 (4) R hour / hour big hit" are set. However, the big hit type determined in the small hit via big hit type determination table is the first small hit (16 (15) R hour / hour big hit), the second small hit (9 (8) R hour / hour big hit) , Is a temporary jackpot type associated with each of the third jackpots (those that become 5 (4) R hourly and short jackpots), and are invalid unless a V winning is generated in the jackpot gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 5, the first time-saving state (variation display 1 to 5 times) and the second time-saving state (fluctuation) in which the number of fluctuation displays controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) are different. Due to the presence of a plurality of types of time-saving states such as 7 to 11 times of display), the game in the time-saving state is rich in variety and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  Next, the execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state which is controlled after the termination of the jackpot gaming state of various jackpots will be described. Here, the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit will be described as a typical example. Figure 6 is a diagram showing an example of an execution mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time saving big hit.

  After the big hit game state of 4R time saving big hit, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case of the first time saving state which is controlled to the time saving state over a relatively small number of fluctuation display times (1 to 5 times) Regarding the display, if there is a hold memory of the first special symbol before the occurrence of the big hit game state, and if there is no hold memory of the first special symbol before the occurrence of the big hit game state, As shown in FIGS. 6 (A) and 6 (B), the execution balance mode of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state is different.

  FIG. 6 (A) shows a variation display example of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the case where there is one reserved memory of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control. FIG. 6 (B) shows a variation display example of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when there is no reserved storage of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state control.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the big hit game state is controlled in the state where the first hold memory or the second hold memory is present, the hold memory existing before the control to the big hit game state is the big hit game. In the state, the memory state is continued and carried over until after the jackpot gaming state is finished, and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), at the start of the first time saving state after the end of the big hit gaming state of 4R time saving big hit, of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory existing before the control to the big hit gaming state. When there is a pending storage, since the starting winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 14 for variable display of the second special symbol to be preferentially executed is not yet done, in the time saving state, first, 1 As the variation display of the first time, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the reserved storage of the first special symbol carried over from before the occurrence of the big hit game state is executed. In the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the 8R time saving big hit, the game is performed in which the game ball is entered into the gate 32 and the second starting winning opening 14 after the right hit is made, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 6 (A). In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14 can be executed.

  After the start of the time saving state, until the start winning a prize to the second starting winning opening 14, when the reserved memory of the first special symbol exists, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory. Is executed. In FIG. 6 (A), after the start of the time saving state, until the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, one of the first special symbols that existed before the control to the big hit game state. The example in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed once based on the pending storage of is shown. In FIG. 6 (A), after the start of the time saving state, the second time after the start of the time saving state based on the fact that the variable display based on the start winning in the second start winning port 14 is executed once for the second time. An example in which the time saving control is ended is shown in the variable display.

  As for the winning prize for the start to the second starting winning opening 14, as described above, four pieces of reserved storage information are possible. Therefore, the variable winning ball device 15 in the electric support state is executed after the start of the first time saving state and before, for example, one execution of the variable display based on the starting winning on the second starting winning opening 14 is completed. 6A, a maximum of four pieces of second reserved storage information can occur during the release control state of FIG. In this embodiment, in the case of the first time saving state, the variable display having a relatively long variable display time is based on the first start winning prize to the second start winning port 14 so that the second hold storage information is easily accumulated. Is executed. It should be noted that the variable display in which the variable display time is rather long may not be executed.

  After that, when the second hold storage information is stored by the time the execution of the variable display based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is completed, for example, the third time in FIG. 6A. ~ As shown in the 6th variation display column of the 2nd special symbol, the variation display based on the maximum 4 pieces of the 2nd hold storage information is executed, and the small hit lottery with the winning probability of about 1/7 is the 2nd hold. Only the number of stored information items can be executed. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, it is possible to increase the player's expectation regarding the occurrence of a big hit via a small hit based on the second held storage information that occurred during the first time saving state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), at the start of the time saving state, when there is no hold storage of the first special symbol based on the hold storage that existed before the control to the big hit game state, there is a 4R time saving big hit. In a time-saving state after the jackpot gaming state is over, a right-handed strike is made to enter the game ball into the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14, and the game ball cannot enter the first starting winning opening 13. As it becomes a game state, as shown in FIG. 6 (B), the variable display of the second special symbol based on the starting winning prize to the second starting winning opening 14 can be executed from the first varying display. In this case as well, as in the case of holding storage in FIG. 6A, a maximum of four pieces of second holding storage information as shown in FIG. 6B can occur. As a result, even if the first time saving state ends, it is possible to increase the player's expectation regarding the occurrence of a big hit via a small hit based on the second held storage information that occurred during the first time saving state.

  The ending condition of the first time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of 4R time-short big hit, the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed once, as described above, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is established when the variable display is executed five times in total.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (A), at the start of the time saving state, after the variable display of the first special symbol based on one reserved memory of the first special symbol existing at the start is executed once, When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed for the second time, the variable display number of the second special symbol is executed once by executing the variable display of the second time, and thus the end condition is When satisfied, the control of the first time saving state is ended.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (B), at the start of the time saving state, when the reserved storage of the first special symbol does not exist at the start and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed from the first time, 1 In the variable display of the second time, the variable display number of the second special symbol is executed once, so that the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, and the control of the time saving state is ended.

  4R time reduction big hit after the jackpot game state end condition, the end condition of the first time saving state, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol has been executed once, or the total of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol It is set to hold when the number of times of execution is 5 times. Thereby, for example, as shown in FIG. 6 (A), even if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol at the start of the first time saving state, in the first time saving state, from the variable display of the first special symbol. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is advantageous for the player, is executed the same number of times (one time) as when the first special symbol is not held and stored at the start of the first time saving state, so that the first time saving The condition ends.

  Further, for example, at the start of the first time-saving state, even if there is a maximum of four reserved memory of the first special symbol, in the first time-saving state, the variable display of the first special symbol based on the four reserved memory. After the execution, the first time saving state ends by being executed the same number of times (one time) as the case where the reserved storage of the first special symbol does not exist at the start of the first time saving state.

  In this way, the ending condition of the first time saving state after the big hit game state of 4R time reduction big hit, the variable display number of the second special symbol is executed once, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol Since the total number of variable displays is set to be satisfied when it is executed five times, when the first special symbol at the beginning of the first time saving state has a pending storage, and when there is not, During the control period of 1 hour saving state, the number of executable times of the variable display of the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player, can be the same number of times, so there is a difference in advantage and disadvantage for the player in the time saving state (high base state) This can be prevented and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, FIG. 6 and the like, the ending condition of the first time saving state defined by the total variation display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number of times the variation display by the first reserved memory is performed. (4 times) and a predetermined number of times the predetermined variable display for the second special symbol is executed (1 time), so the total number of times is set, so in the first time saving state, fluctuation due to the first reserved memory Even if the display is performed a certain number of times, it is possible to prevent a difference from being disadvantageous and disadvantageous to the player due to the first hold storage information, and to ensure fairness of the game.

  Also, for the big hit types other than the symbol 4R hour / hour jackpot, the minimum fluctuation display count "1" in the hour / short state in the above-mentioned symbol 4R hour / hour / big hit is replaced by "7", and the maximum in the hour / short state in the symbol 4R hour / hour / big hit. The variable display count “5” is replaced with “11”. Therefore, even in the big hit type other than the symbol 4R time-short and big hit, as with the case of the 8R time short-and-big hit, whether or not there is a reserved memory number of the first special symbol at the start of the first time-short state after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time-short hit And, regardless of the number, the second time saving state continues until the same variable display of the second special symbol is executed 7 times. Thereby, with respect to the big hit types other than the symbol 4R time / short and big hit, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those obtained for the symbol 4R time / short and big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 6, when the number of time saving (electricity support) after the big hit is set to a relatively small number, as described above, the player is determined by the number of the first holding storage information immediately after the end of the big hit game state. It is preferable that the number of times of time saving (electric power saving) that is disadvantageous to is not set.

  7 and 8 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. 7 and 8 show the relationship between specific command data for the effect control command, the name of the command, and the designated content of the command. In the game control microcomputer 560, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in accordance with the game control state.

  Main commands in FIGS. 7 and 8 will be described. Command 80XX (H) is a production control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern that is variably displayed on the production display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). When a unique number is given to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls to start the effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the effect display device.

  The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are display result designating commands indicating a display result including a misalignment display result, a big hit type, a big hit display result for each small hit type, and a small hit display result.

  Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol fixed designation command that designates to end the fluctuation of the first and second special symbols.

  The commands A001 to A005 (H) are hit start designation commands for designating the start of the big hit game state for each kind of big hit.

  The command A1XX (H) is a special winning opening open designation command which indicates a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command after opening the special winning opening indicating that the opening (closing) of the number (round) of the XX number of times is open.

  The commands A301 to A305 (H) are hit end designation commands for designating the end of the big hit game state for each kind of big hit.

  The command A 401 (H) is a first start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the first starting award has been won. The command A402 (H) is a second start winning a prize designating command that specifies that the second starting award has been won.

  The command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates that the gaming state is the normal state (low base state). The command B001 (H) is a first time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the first time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a second time saving state designation command that specifies that the gaming state is the second time saving state (high base state).

  The command C0XX (H) is a first reserved storage number designating command for designating the first reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. The command C1XX (H) is a second reserved storage number designating command for designating the second reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a reserved storage number designating command for designating the reserved storage number after subtraction when the reserved storage number is subtracted, but not limited to this. For each of the first number of reserved storages and the second number of reserved storages, a reserved storage number subtraction designation command designating subtraction of the number of reserved storages by 1 may be used.

  The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are results of winning determination such as a big hit determination, a big hit type determination, a variation pattern type determination, etc. at the time of a start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14. It is a production control command indicating the contents. Among them, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designating command showing whether or not a big hit, whether or not it is a small hit, and a judgment result of the type of the big hit, out of the determination results at the time of winning. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range the variation pattern type random number value is in the winning determination result. Is.

  The command C401 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. The command C402 (H) is a command designating the start of the second small hit. The command C403 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. The command C501 (H) is a command that specifies to start the first small hit. The command C502 (H) is a command that specifies to start the second small hit. The command C503 (H) is a command that specifies to start the third small hit. The command C601 (H) is a V winning designation command that designates that there is a V winning. The command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection designation command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than the V winning ball) to the V determination winning device 87 is detected.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 is provided with a first hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. The first pending storage buffer has a jackpot determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and , A random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) is stored.

  Regarding the second special symbol, the RAM 55 is provided with a second reserved memory buffer for storing the reserved memory information of the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a big hit determination random number (random R) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and , A random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) is stored.

  Based on the winning in the first starting winning opening 13, the CPU 56 extracts random number values from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Execute the process of saving (storing). Specifically, these random number values are extracted and stored (stored) in the first reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Further, based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 14, the CPU 56 extracts random number values from each of the random number circuit 503 and the random counter for generating the software random number, and saves them in the second reserved storage buffer. Execute the process of saving (storing) in the area. Specifically, these random number values are extracted and stored (stored) in the second reserved storage buffer based on the winning of the second start winning opening 14.

  In this way, the storage of the information regarding the starting winning as described above in the storage buffer may be referred to as "stored". It should be noted that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted at the time of winning the start and stored in the reserved storage buffer in advance, but a variation pattern setting process described later. You may make it extract at the time of the change start of a special symbol.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) to execute the timer interrupt process. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

  In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, normal time initializing processing, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initializing the random number circuit 503), display random number updating processing (variation pattern) Type determination, update processing of various random numbers such as fluctuation pattern determination), and random number update processing for initial value (update processing of initial value of count value of random number generation counter for normal symbol determination) and the like are executed.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is performed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether the power-on signal has been turned on) (S20). Next, via the input driver circuit 58, the gate switch 32a, the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a, the count switch 23, the V winning switch 87a, the V determination winning switch 15a, and the V determination ejection. The detection signal of the switch 15b is input, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: S21).

  Next, the CPU 56 is a first special symbol display device 8a, a second special symbol display device 8b, a normal symbol display device 10, a first special symbol reserved memory display device 18a, a second special symbol reserved memory display device 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 41 is executed (S22). About the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the normal symbol display device 10, a control for outputting a drive signal to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. To execute.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for regular symbol determination and a random number for small type determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23 ). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order are executed according to the corresponding process, and the special symbol process. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 10 in a predetermined order, and the value of the normal symbol process flag is in the gaming state. Update accordingly.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 100 (production control command control process: S28). Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, starting information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to the hall management computer (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing such as setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start winning opening switch 13a, the second starting winning opening switch 14a and the prize winning switch 25a (S30).

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for performing special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). Further, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer to execute the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 10.

  After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process is terminated. According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every predetermined time.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S26). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, a starting port switch passing process is executed (S311). Then, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the RAM 55 stores the pending storage data (first pending storage data) such as the big hit determination random number obtained based on the starting winning into the first starting winning opening 13, as described above. A first reserved storage buffer, and a second reserved storage buffer for storing reserved storage data (second reserved storage data) such as a big hit determination random number obtained based on a winning start to the second starting winning opening 14 Is provided. In each of these pending storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the number of storages in each pending storage (4 for the first pending storage data and 4 for the second pending storage data) is secured.

  In the starting opening switch passage processing, if the first starting opening switch 13a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is provided on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the first reserved storage number counter that counts the number is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination are obtained from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Random numbers) are extracted and stored (stored) in the storage area of the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, if the second starting opening switch 14a is turned on, the number of stored second reserved storage data is counted on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the reserved memory number counter is incremented by 1, and numerical data (for example, a big hit determination random number, a variation pattern type determination random number, and a variation pattern determination random number) are extracted from a random number circuit 503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, a process of storing (storing) them in the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer is executed.

  In the following description regarding the reserved storage, the storage of the above-described information regarding the starting winning in the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer may be referred to as “reserved storage”. Further, the numerical data stored in the first pending storage buffer may be referred to as first pending storage information, and the numerical data stored in the second pending storage buffer may be referred to as second pending storage information. As I did.

The processing of S300 to S307 is the following processing.
The special symbol normal process (S300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a small hit, and determining a small hit type in the case of a small hit. The fluctuation pattern setting process (S301) is a process of determining a fluctuation pattern and controlling the fluctuation time timer to start counting.

  The display result designation command transmission process (S302) is a process for controlling the production control microcomputer 100 to transmit a display result designation command. The special symbol changing process (S303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the change time of the change pattern selected in the change pattern setting process elapses. Special symbol stop process (S304), the variation display in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b when the passage of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is timed by the variation time timer It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying a stop symbol.

  The special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) is a processing of performing control for opening the special winning opening in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 when the big hit game state is entered. In the special winning opening opening process (S306), control for transmitting a production control command of a round display during the big hit game state to the production control microcomputer 100, processing for confirming establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening, and the like are performed. Processing. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there are no remaining rounds, the big hit ending process is performed. The big hit end process (S307) is a process for performing control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control at the end of the big hit game state.

  The small hit opening pre-processing (S308) is a processing for performing control for opening the working opening in the V determination winning device 87 when the small hit game state is entered. The small hitting open process (S309) is a process of confirming whether or not a game ball has won V in the V winning area 870 in the V determination winning device 87, and transmitting a V winning designation command when the player has won V. Is a process of performing a process such as a process of transmitting a small hit end designation command at the end timing of the small hit.

  The small hit completion process (S310) is a process for shifting to the big hit game state when the game ball has won V in the V winning area 870 in the big hit variable winning ball device 20 (transmission of a big hit start designation command, big hit display). (Time setting, jackpot opening mode setting, process flag transition setting of jackpot opening preprocessing, etc.) is performed, and when the relevant V winning is not made, the jackpot game state is not changed and special It is a process for executing a process for shifting to the symbol normal process (S300).

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passage processing of S312. In the starting opening switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the first starting opening switch 13a is in the ON state (S1211). If the first starting opening switch 13a is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first starting opening switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage for counting the first reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S1212). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to S1221.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting the values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating the software random number and storing them in the storage area of the first reserved storage buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a big hit determination random number (random R), a big hit type determination random number (random 1), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are extracted, It is stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning-time effect process in which the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected winning prize of the first special symbol is subsequently executed are determined at the time of starting winning (S1215).

  In this embodiment, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14, and various data obtained at the time of the starting winning is stored as reserved storage information, and then the variable display is started. When the condition is satisfied, at the timing of starting the variable display, in the special symbol normal process (S300), based on the pending storage information, the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) to start the variable display, the variation Whether or not the display result is the big hit display result and the big hit type are determined based on the big hit determination value and the big hit type determination value set corresponding to the various random number values described above. Then, the determination of the variation pattern (including the determination of the variation pattern type) in the variation pattern setting process (S301) is performed using the variation pattern type determination value and the variation pattern determination value set corresponding to the various random number values described above. Based on.

  On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the timing before the variable display based on the starting winning prize to the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 is started, specifically, the game ball is the first starting. At the timing (timing at which the hold storage information is stored) at the winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14, the hold storage information storing various data obtained at the start winning is pre-read, and the pre-read hold Based on the stored information, it is determined in advance whether or not to be a big hit, whether to be a small hit, determination of the type of big hit, and determination of the variation pattern type, corresponding to the various random number values described above. Based on the jackpot determination value, the jackpot type determination value, and the variation pattern type determination value that have been set, pre-reading determination effect processing is performed. By doing so, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the variable display result is predicted in advance before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and based on various determination results at the time of winning the start, the effect symbol is changed. It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect such as a pre-reading notice that gives a big hit (possibly a big hit) during variable display.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (S1216), and also transmits the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (S1217). In addition, the CPU 56 controls to send the first start winning award designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1218), sets the value of the first reserve storage number counter in the EXT data, and designates the first reserve storage number. Control for transmitting a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1219).

  By executing the processing of S1216, S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, gaming state such as jackpot game state) Every time a winning a prize is given to the starting winning opening 13, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, by executing the processing of S1216 to S1219, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 occurs, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, the first starting winning designating command. And, a set of four commands of the first reserved storage number designation command is collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second starting opening switch 14a is in the on state (S1221). If the second starting opening switch 14a is not in the on state, the processing is ended as it is. If the second starting opening switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (S1222). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 56 extracts the values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating the software random number, and stores them in the storage area of the second reserved storage buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a big hit determination random number (random 1), a big hit type determination random number (random 2), a variation pattern type determination random number (random 3), and a variation pattern determination random number (random 4) are extracted, It is stored in the save area.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning-time effect process similar to the winning-time effect process as described in S1215 for the detected winning prize of the second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (S1226), and control to transmit the variation type command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Is performed (S1227). Further, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second start winning award designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S1228), sets the value of the second reserved storage number counter in the EXT data, and designates the second reserved storage number. Control for transmitting a command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S1229).

  By executing the processing of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, gaming state such as jackpot game state) Every time the player wins in the starting winning opening 14, both the symbol designating command and the variation type command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of S1226 to S1229, when the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, the symbol designating command, the variation type command, the second starting winning designating command. And a set of four commands of the second reserved storage number designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (S51). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, the process ends.

  If there is no reserved storage data in the reserved storage buffer in S51, the process for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command (S80) is performed, and then the process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer in S51, the CPU 56 confirms whether there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer (S52). If there is pending storage data in the second pending storage buffer, to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved storage data in the second reserved storage buffer, data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer (S53).

  In this embodiment, hereinafter, depending on whether the data indicating "first" or the data indicating "second" is set to the special symbol pointer, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b are executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is performed. Be done. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set to the special symbol pointer, based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. Is performed.

  By the control of S52 to S54, if at least one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol display device 8b based on the data of the second reserved storage, It is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol display device 8a based on the data of the first reserved memory.

  Next, in the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages indicated by the special symbol pointer = 1 and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, the CPU 56, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It stores in the random number buffer of RAM55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are erased.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 sets the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers are always the same as the order of the first reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this. Further, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. It is like this.

  In addition, CPU56, on the basis of the value of the reserved storage number counter of the special symbol pointer after subtraction, performs the control to send the reserved storage number designation command of the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100. (S59). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first reserved storage number designation command. When the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to send the second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, "first" for indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol , Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of S300 to S307 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 1 (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 56 performs the big hit determination by reading the big hit determination random number extracted in S1214 of the start opening switch passage processing or S1224 of the start opening switch passage processing and stored in the hold storage buffer or the random number buffer. The big hit judging module compares a predetermined big hit judging value (see FIG. 5) and a small hit judging value (see FIG. 5) with a big hit judging random number, and if they match, decides to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program that executes the process of determining. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination process and a small hit determination process.

  In the process of the big hit determination, if the first special symbol matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5 (A), the second special symbol matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 5 (B) Then, it is decided to be a big hit for the special symbol. When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in S60), the process proceeds to S71. Determining whether or not to be a big hit, it is to determine whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, it is also to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbol display device is a big hit symbol ..

  When it is decided to make a big hit in S61 (Y of S61), a big hit flag showing that it is a big hit is set (S71).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol pointer indicates "first" (S72). When the special symbol pointer is “first”, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5C is selected (S73), and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, when the special symbol pointer does not indicate “first” (in the case of “second”), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 5D is selected (S74), S75. Proceed to.

  In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is set to the jackpot type. The determination is made (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any big hit determination value in S61 (N in S61), the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second". By checking whether or not there is, it is confirmed whether or not the big hit determination target is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 described later. On the other hand, when the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating “second” (which is a variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table of FIG. 5 (B) Is used to determine which of the small hit determination values the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches, thereby performing the small hit determination processing (S76). That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIG. 5B (Y in S76), it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (S77Y), a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit is set (S78).

  After the small hit flag is set, the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 5 (E) is selected (S79), and the value matches the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area. The big hit type corresponding to the value to be determined is determined as the type of the big hit via big hit (S80). Then, the process proceeds to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the small hit determination random number (random 1) does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), the process proceeds to S82 described later.

  In S81, data indicating the type of the big hit determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, when the big hit type is "symbol 15R hour short big hit", "01" is set in the big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "symbol 4R hour short big hit", the data showing the big hit type As a result, "02" is set in the big hit type buffer. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "16 (15) R hourly short big hit through small hit", "03" is set in a temporary big hit type buffer different from the big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is a short-time big hit via small hit 9 (8) R big hit, "04" is set in the temporary big hit type buffer as data indicating the big hit type. When the type of big hit is 5 (4) R short time big hit via big hit, "05" is set in the temporary big hit type buffer as data showing the big hit type. Of these, data showing 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot via small hit, 9 (8) R hour / hour jackpot via small hit, and 5 (4) R hour / hour jackpot via small hit are V winnings in the small hit game state. If it does not occur, there is data that is not valid without a big hit and is provisionally set.

  In S82, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a deviating symbol is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hitting flag is set, one of the small hitting symbols "1", "5", and "9" which is the small hitting symbol according to the small hitting type selected and determined in S80 is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. To do. When the big hit flag is set, either the big hit design which is the big hit design which is selected and decided in S75, "3", or "7" is determined as the stop design of the special design. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S79).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process process.

  In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b. Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer is When it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is ended. Further, the symbol confirmation designation command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, such as when it is determined to be the symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot or the symbol 4R hour / hour jackpot, the CPU 56 sets the hour / hour flag which is a flag that is set when the hour / hour is controlled to the hour / hour state. When it is set, the time saving flag is reset (S134), and either the big hit start 1 designation command or the big hit start 2 designation command is given to the effect control microcomputer 100, depending on the determined big hit type. Processing for transmitting the command (major hit start designation command) (S135).

  As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of big hit is the symbol 4R hourly short big hit, the big hit start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the type of the big hit is the symbol 15R hour short big hit, the big hit start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the big hit type corresponds to is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, a value corresponding to a big hit display time (a time at which, for example, the effect display device 9 is notified that a big hit has occurred) is set to the special winning opening control timer (S136). After that, in the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the special winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the special winning opening is opened and the round is started.

  Further, depending on the type of big hit specified by the data showing the kind of big hit stored in the RAM 55, the opening pattern data for each kind of big hit stored in the ROM 54 described above is referred to, and the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times). , Or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), and other data indicating the opening mode are set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the release count data is set in the release count counter for counting the release count. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (S305) (S138), and the processing is ended. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special winning opening opening pre-processing.

  Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the small hitting opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of opening times including the setting of the small hitting open control timer used for the small hit opening control (for example, 10 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time between opening are set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening pretreatment.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state by the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set (S142). If the time saving flag is not set in S142, it means that the time saving state is not set, and thus the process proceeds to S152 which will be described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, because it is a time saving state, for counting the total value of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol in the time saving state The total time reduction counter as a counting unit is updated by subtracting -1 (S143).

  In the big hit end process of FIG. 14, the total time saving counter that is subtracted and updated in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when being controlled to the first time saving state after the 4R symbol time saving big hit, and is of a type other than the 4R symbol time saving big hit. When it is controlled to the second time saving state after the big hit, it is set to 11 times in S168, and in S143, the variable display which is the outlier display result is subtracted and updated every time it is executed. The total time saving counter is used for both the determination of whether the ending condition of the first saving time condition is satisfied and the determination of whether the ending condition of the second saving time condition is satisfied.

  Next, based on checking whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end time of the variable display of the second special symbol (S145). In S145, when it is the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, not the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, in S145, when it is the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (S146). The special figure 2 hour / hour counter that is subtracted and updated in S146 is a counting means for counting the variation display number of the second special symbol when it is controlled to the first hour / hour state or the second hour / hour state after the big hit game is over. In the jackpot ending process of FIG. 14, the special figure 2 time saving counter is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time saving state, and set to 11 times by S168 when controlled to the second time saving state. To be done. The special figure 2 hour reduction counter is subtracted and updated by S146 each time the variable display that is the display result of the second special symbol is lost is executed.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 is "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour count counter becomes “0”, one of the ending conditions of the first hour / hour state is satisfied, or one of the ending conditions of the second hour / hour state is satisfied. Since it is time, the process proceeds to S149, which will be described later, in order to end the currently executed first time saving state or second time saving state. On the other hand, in S147, if the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour count counter is not "0", it is to confirm whether or not another one of the end conditions of the first hour / hour state is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to S148.

  In S148, based on the total variable display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state, in order to confirm whether the ending condition of the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed is satisfied First, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter updated and subtracted in S143 has become "0" (S148). If the count value of the total time saving counter is not "0" in S148, the process proceeds to S152, which will be described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total time saving counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149.

  S149, S150, in each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, when it is determined by S147 that the variable display count of the second special symbol has reached the number of end conditions, and by S148, the first special symbol and At any time, when it is determined that the total variable display number of the second special symbols has reached the number of end conditions, it is executed in order to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed. ..

  In S149, the set time saving flag is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set hour / hour counter is reset (S150). Then, in response to the completion of the time saving condition based on the number of times of variable display in the time saving state, a process for transmitting a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151), and the process proceeds to S152.

  In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal process.

  In such a special symbol stop process, by S142 to S151, when the first time saving state, the second special symbol is executed once the deviation change display, the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 When any one of the execution of the out-of-range variation display is satisfied, the process of ending the first time saving state is performed. Further, by S142 to S151, when in the second time saving state, the execution of the out-of-range variation display of the second special symbol 7 times and the out-of-range variation display of 11 times in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed. When either of the above is established, the process of ending the second time saving state is performed.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process in the special symbol process process. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the special winning opening control timer set before the big hit ending process is executed (S161). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed (S162). If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if the time has passed, it is confirmed whether or not the type of the jackpot to be ended is the 8R hour / short jackpot, based on the data indicating the jackpot type set in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 in the present jackpot gaming state ( S163).

  When the type of the big hit that ends in S163 is the symbol 4R hour / hour big hit, the special figure 2 hour / hour counter is set to "1" (second special hour) as the ending condition of the first hour / hour state in order to control the first hour / hour state. The data of the variable display 1 time of the symbol) is set (S164), and the data of "5" (corresponding to the total variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 times) is set in the total hour reduction counter (S165). ). Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

  When the type of big hit to be finished by S163 is not the symbol 4R time-short big hit, it is when the type of big hit to be finished is a big hit type other than the symbol 4R time-short big hit, and to control to the second time-short state, the second time-short state As the ending condition of, the data of “7” (corresponding to one variation display of the second special symbol) is set in the special figure 2 hour / hour counter (S167), and “11” is set to the total hour / hour counter (first special symbol and The data of the total variation display 11 times of the second special symbol is set (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

  In S170, the time saving flag is set in order to control the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S170). When controlling to the first time saving state, the first time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second time saving state, the second time saving flag is set. Then, depending on the end of the big hit game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S171), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal process.

  Thereby, after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time short and big hit, is controlled to the first time short state, and is controlled to the second time short state after the end of the big hit game state of big hit type other than the symbol 4R time short and big hit. Then, the respective end conditions of the first time saving state and the second time saving state are individually defined by the number of fluctuation display times of only the second special symbol and the total number of times of variable display opening of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It

  In such a jackpot end process, by S164, S165, after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time short jackpot, the execution of the one-off variation display of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol Is set to control to the first time saving state until any one of the execution of the deviation change display of 5 times is satisfied. Further, by S167, S168, after the big hit game state of the big hit type other than the symbol 4R hour short big hit, the execution of the deviation display of 7 times of the second special symbol and the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 11 The setting for controlling to the second time saving state is made until either one of execution of the out-of-range variation display is satisfied.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the small hit opening pre-processing (S308). In the small hit opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 22 to move the movable portion 872 to the open state based on the opening mode of the small hit set in S140 of FIG. 13, thereby operating the V determination winning device 87. The opening operation of the mouth is started (S411). Next, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit start designation command indicating that the small hit game state is started to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S412). Next, the CPU 56 sets a V determination winning number counter as counting means in order to use the winning number in the V winning area 870 in the open state of the small hit as a condition for ending the open state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V determination winning number counter is set to "10" and the setting for down counting the V winning number is made. Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting open process (S309) (S413).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a small hitting open process (S309) in the special symbol process process. In the processing for opening the small hit, the CPU 56 updates the small hit opening control timer by -1 (S430). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the V determination winning number counter that counts the number of V winnings is "0" in S435 described later (S431). The V determination winning number counter is set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 15, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". When the count value of the V determination winning number counter is "0" in S430, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, when the count value of the V determination winning number counter is not “0” in S430, it is confirmed whether or not the small hit opening control timer set in S140 of FIG. 13 has timed out (timer value = 0). Yes (S432).

  If the small hit opening control timer has timed out in S432, the process proceeds to S441. On the other hand, if the small hit opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled according to the time value of the small hit opening control timer based on the small hit opening mode set in S140 of FIG. Then, the movable part 872 is operated to the open state, and the processing for opening and closing the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 is performed (S433).

  Next, in order to determine whether or not a V prize generated by a game ball entering the V prize area 870 which is in an open state inside the V determination prize winning device 87 from the V prize opening is detected, It is determined whether the switch 87a is in the on state (S434). The ON state in S434 is when the V winning is detected, and the V winning flag which is set when the V winning is detected is set (S435). Then, processing for transmitting the V winning ball detection designation command is performed (S436). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball has been detected, and can recognize the V winning number. Next, the opening / closing member is operated by driving the solenoid to change the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 from the open state to the closed state (S437), and the process proceeds to S439. As a result, when the first one of the game balls that has entered the V determination winning device 87 wins the V prize, the V winning opening of the V winning area 870 is closed, and then the game that enters the V determination winning device 87. All the balls are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V determination winning switch 15b.

  On the other hand, when it is not in the ON state in S434, it means that the V winning is not detected, and it is determined whether or not the V determination winning switch 15b is in the ON state (S438). If it is in the on state in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and if it is not in the on state in S438, the process ends.

  In S439, the count value of the V determination winning number counter set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 15 is down-counted by "-1" (S439), and the process for transmitting the V determination winning ball detection designation command is performed. (S440). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning ball that has entered the determination winning device 87 has been detected after the V winning ball has been detected, and enters the determination winning device 87. It is possible to recognize the number of played game balls.

  When the count value of the V determination winning number counter is “0” in S431, it means that the small winning V winning number has reached the upper limit value, so that the small win opening end condition is satisfied. When the small hit opening control timer times out in S432, it means that the small hit opening end condition is satisfied due to the end of the small hit opening control. At these times, the CPU 56 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable portion 872 in a closed state, and closes the operation opening of the V determination winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V determination prize number counter becomes “0”, even if the V determination prize device 87 according to the opening mode of the small hit is being opened, the count value of the V determination prize number counter is determined according to the count value. The V determination winning device 87 is forcibly closed. When the small hit opening control timer times out, the V determination winning device 87 is closed in response to the end of the small hit opening control in the small hit opening mode.

  Next, the data corresponding to the specific period which is the V winning effective period after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning effective period timer (S442), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the small hit end process ( The value is updated to the value corresponding to S310 (S443), and the process ends. As a result, timing of a specific period, which is the V winning effective period after the V determination winning device 87 is closed, is started. By setting the specific period which is the V winning effective period in this way, even if the game ball passes the V winning region later than the time when the game ball normally passes some time, the game ball Can be detected. Further, since the specific period is set, even if someone illegally tries to win the V winning area, only the period is detected, so it is possible to prevent fraud.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a small hit end process (S310) in the special symbol process process. In the small hit completion post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning effective period timer by -1 (S441) and checks whether the V winning effective period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

  When the V winning effective period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is determined in order to determine whether the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. It is determined whether or not is on (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that the V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and the V winning flag indicating that the V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, the processing for transmitting the V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the processing is ended. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

  When the V winning effective period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening / closing member to return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big hit, and the big hit flag is set (S449).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hitting game state, if the player makes a right hit in accordance with a right hit promotion notification described later, the game ball will enter the V determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. Based on the fact that the gaming ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 always wins the V winning area 870, the V winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the big hit flag is set in S449, and the big hit game state is controlled.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines that the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer in S81 is officially a big hit due to the occurrence of the V winning, and the data is changed to the big hit type buffer. Officially memorize (S450). Then, the hour-shortening flags (the first hour-shortening flag and the second hour-shortening flag set in the big hit end process of FIG. 14) set at that time are temporarily reset (S451).

  Next, the CPU 56 transmits a jackpot start 3 designation command, a jackpot start 4 designation command, or a jackpot start 5 designation command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the big hit gaming state is starting. Next, the big winning opening control timer is set to a value corresponding to a big hit display time (a time at which, for example, the effect display device 9 notifies that a big hit has occurred) (S453).

  In addition, referring to the big hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval depending on the kind of big hit. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as time (the time when the special winning opening is closed between rounds) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the release count data is set in the release count counter for counting the release count in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (S305) (S455), and the processing is ended. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state is entered.

  If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot gaming state does not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via the jackpot stored in the jackpot temporary type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special symbol process flag is set. The value is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when the V winning is not generated in the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state is not shifted.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the effect control main processing executed by the effect control CPU 101 of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts execution of effect control main processing. In the effect control main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) (S701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). For example, in the command analysis process, when the variation pattern command is received, the command data is stored in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 103. Further, in the command analysis process, when the display result designation command is received, the command data is stored in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 103. In addition, when various effect control commands are received, a flag indicating that the command has been received is set. Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process processing, in order to perform various effects such as effects corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the content of the effect control command analyzed in S704, among the processes corresponding to the control state, A process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected to execute production control.

  Next, a random number updating process of updating the count value of the counter for generating various random numbers such as random numbers for selecting and selecting various effect contents is executed (S706). Then, it transfers to S702.

  In the production control microcomputer 100, when the variation pattern command is received, the variation display of the production symbol is started, and when the variation display time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed, or the symbol confirmation designation command is received. When this is done, the variable display of the effect design is stopped. By performing such effect control main processing, in the effect control microcomputer 100, the effect display device 9, various lamps, and the effect display device 9 are transmitted according to the effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 and received. By controlling the effect device such as the speaker 27, various effect controls according to the game state are performed.

  In the effect control microcomputer 100, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the variable display of the effect symbol is started, and when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the variable display of the effect symbol is stopped. Good. The fluctuation pattern command is a command composed of data capable of specifying the length of the fluctuation time and the information necessary for designating the fluctuation display mode such as the fluctuation display result. The fluctuation display is controlled so as to be executed at the fluctuation time corresponding to each fluctuation pattern command. In addition, the stop symbol when executing the effect control for variably displaying the effect symbol is determined based on the determination of whether the symbol is a hit or a big hit based on the display result designation command.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, after performing the processes of S500 and S501, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. The following processes are executed in each process.

  In the production control process process, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled, and the production corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the second special symbol is executed, but is synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol. Both the control related to the effect and the control related to the effect synchronized with the change of the second special symbol are executed in one effect control process process. Further, in the effect control process process, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol (synchronized) is also executed in a manner that can be displayed in parallel with the variable display of the special symbol.

  Hitting ball promotion effect process (S500): Based on various effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 560, the game state is confirmed, and a hitting ball promotion effect according to the game state is executed. The hitting ball promotion effect is an effect of giving a notification for promoting the hitting of the game ball to at least one of the first route (left hitting route) and the second route (right hitting route) in the game area 7. Specifically, the hit ball promotion effect includes a right hit promotion notification effect for notifying that the driving of the game ball to the second path (right hit path) is promoted, but the hit ball promotion effect includes the right hit promotion. You may make it include the notification production | generation and the production | generation of the left-handing promotion notification which gives the notification which promotes the driving | running of the game ball to the 1st path | route (left-handing path | route).

  The right-handing promotion notification effect is, for example, continuously displaying a character image such as "right-handing" that suggests right-handing and promotes it with a right-pointing arrow image in a specific display area of the effect display device. It is done by doing.

  In this embodiment, left hitting is basically used as the hitting of the game ball, and as the hitting ball promotion effect, the left hitting promotion notification is not executed and the right hitting promotion notification is executed based on the second route (right). Based on the state that the driving of the game ball to the hitting route (right hitting) is promoted, and conversely, the right hitting promotion notification is not executed, the hitting of the gaming ball to the first route (left hitting route) (left) An example of effect control for promoting hitting will be described.

  As the hit ball promotion effect, effect control may be performed in which both left hit promotion notification and right hit promotion notification are used in accordance with the game state. Further, as the hitting ball promotion effect, effect control may be performed in which both left hitting promotion notification and right hitting promotion notification are selectively used according to the game state.

  Prefetching process (S501): This is a process of storing the pending storage information (holding information) corresponding to the pending storage information of the game control microcomputer 560, and making the pending storage information available for the prefetching effect. The prefetch effect is the content of the variable display of the special symbol based on the reserved information by prefetching the reserved memory information before the order of the variable display (symbol fluctuation) of the special symbol based on the reserved memory information comes. Is a production technique such as making a preliminary announcement at a stage before that to determine how the variable display of future special symbols will be. For example, when the held storage information indicates that a small hit or a symbol big hit, a notice effect (refer to FIG. 21) called a hold consecutive notification effect can be executed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the pending storage information targeted for the prefetching effect is referred to as "target pending storage information". In addition, the hold display based on the hold information that is the target of the prefetching effect is referred to as "target hold display".

  Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the variation effect start process (S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (S801): control is performed so that the variation time production, which is the production corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, is started. In response to the received variation pattern command, an effect pattern for the effect during variation is selected, and the effect time timer for measuring the effect time to be executed is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the process during effect during change (S802).

  Production symbol changing process (S802): While controlling the switching timing of each state forming the production pattern and the like, it is monitored whether the production time counted by the production time timer has ended. The value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the variable time effect stop processing (S803) in order to end the variable time effect based on the end of the effect time or the reception of the symbol fixing designation command. Update to value.

  Effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S803): When changing, stop the effect, and perform control to display the effect result corresponding to the variable display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display processing (S804): When a big hit (first big hit or second big hit) occurs, control for performing fanfare expression as an effect such as big hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of occurrence of big hit. Perform display control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (S805).

  In-round processing (S805): display control during a big hit round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending process (S807).

  Post-round processing (S806): Display control between rounds of big hits is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Small hit display processing (S808): When a small hit occurs, fanfare production as an effect such as a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the small hit is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). Performs display control such as control. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hitting open process (S809).

  Small hitting open process (S809): In the small hit, various effect controls are performed while the V determination winning device 87 is open. Then, when the V determination winning device 87 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit end effect processing (S810).

  Small hit end effect processing (S810): The effect display device 9 performs effect control to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. In addition, in the small hitting game state, when the V winning of the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 87a and it is determined that the V winning has occurred, the V winning effect control for notifying that the V winning has occurred is performed. When a V winning occurs in the small hit game state, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (S804) in order to shift to the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the V winnings are not generated in the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state is not shifted, so the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  In the production control process processing, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled by the above-described processing, the production at the time of variation corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is started, and the production result corresponding to the variation display result of the special symbol is obtained. Is displayed. The effect control CPU 101, for example, recognizes the specified variation pattern and the display result for the variation display to be executed based on the received variation pattern command and the display result designation command, and produces the variation effect. Determine the result. Further, in the effect control process processing, the execution status of the effect control process is confirmed in S500, and a hitting ball promotion effect is executed according to the game control state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute a plurality of types of ball-hit acceleration effects including a high base state right-hit promotion notification, a small hit right-hit promotion notification, and a big-hit right-hit promotion notification as the ball hit promotion effects. The high base state right hit promotion notification is a hit ball promotion effect for making a right hit in the high base state and aiming the game ball to enter the gate 32 and the variable winning ball device 15 (second starting winning port 14). is there. The small hit right hit promotion notification is a hit ball promotion effect for making a right hit and aiming the game ball to enter the V determination prize device 87 (V prize area) in the small hit game state. The big hit right hit promotion notification is a hit ball promotion effect for aiming the game ball to enter the big hit variable winning ball device 20 (big prize opening) in the big hit game state.

  High base state Right hit promotion notification, small hit right hit promotion notification, and big hit right hit promotion notification include a character image such as "right hit" that suggests right hit and promotes with a right arrow image. You may perform using the same image displayed continuously. In other words, even if the right-handed promotion notification is in a state in which it is not possible to specify which of the promotion notification in the high base state, the promotion notification in the small hit and the promotion notification in the big hit can be displayed. Good. The right-handed promotion notification is an image for continuously displaying a character image such as "right-handed" that promotes right-handing and is displayed together with a right-pointing arrow image. Alternatively, different images may be used, such as a yellow image for the small hit right hit promotion notification, and a red image for the big hit right hit promotion notification. In this embodiment, an example in which a high base state right hitting promotion notification is displayed in a blue image, a small hit right hitting promotion notification is displayed in a yellow image, and a big hit right hitting promotion notification is displayed in a red image Will be explained. In addition, the size of the image used for the effect may be changed depending on the type of hitting ball promotion effect. For example, the size of the image used for the effect may be different depending on the degree of advantage for the player. As an example, a small image is used for the small hit right hit promotion notification, a small base image is used for the high base state right hit promotion notification, and a medium size image is used for the high hit state right hit promotion notification, and a large hit is used for the right hit promotion notification. The image may be used to give the promotion notification. As for the high base state right-handing promotion notification, a large-sized image may be used to give the promotion notification, as in the case of the big hit right-handing promotion notification.

  Next, as an example of the effect in the big hit game state displayed on the effect display device 9 when the "symbol big hit" or the "big hit via the small hit" is obtained based on the winning of the second start winning hole 14. The V combo effect (VCOMBO effect) will be described. V combo production, when it becomes "symbol big hit" or "big hit via small hit" based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 14, during a predetermined period between predetermined rounds during the big hit gaming state , Is an effect of notifying the number of payouts of award balls (outgoing ball) in a jackpot gaming state in a predetermined stage, and is an effect of mainly notifying a payout number of award balls in a plurality of steps.

  FIG. 20 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of the round suggestion effect. In FIG. 20, an example of the round suggestive effect is shown according to the elapse of time, and images having little relation to the round suggestive effect are omitted. The round suggestion effect is a round in the big hit game state which is executed via the end of the small hit by the display image of the effect display device 9 when it is determined that the big hit is generated due to the occurrence of the V prize in the small hit game state. It is a production that suggests a number.

  20A to 20E, an example of the round suggestive effect is shown. In the small hitting game state, the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to an open state, and the game ball can enter the V determination winning device 87. When a V winning is generated in such a state, a V-shaped V winning image 94 is displayed on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. As a result, a V-winning notification indicating that a winning has occurred is given. The display of the V winning image 94 is continued until the V determination winning device 87 is controlled to be in the closed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, when the V winning image 94 is displayed in response to the occurrence of the V winning, the aura image 95 (95A to 95E) imitating the aura is the V winning. The image 94 is displayed in a display mode like an effect image clinging to the periphery of the image 94. As shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (E), the aura image is composed of a plurality of colors of an aura image white 95A, an aura image blue 95B, an aura image green 95C, an aura image red 95D, or an aura image rainbow 95E. It is displayed in the selected color. In the figure, the color of the aura image 95 is shown by the color character with brackets (the color character is not actually displayed, but may be displayed). As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20E, the color of the aura image 95 can be changed and displayed in a predetermined plurality of stages such as white → blue → green → red → rainbow during the small hitting game. Such a color of the aura image 95 is produced so that it can be changed stepwise according to the number of winning prizes to the V determination winning device 87.

  The color of the aura image 95 may or may not change in the color initially displayed during the small hitting game. The aura image 95 can suggest the expected degree of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state. As for the magnitude relationship of the degree of expectation of the large number of rounds, the correspondence relationship of “white <blue <green <red <rainbow” is predetermined. As a result, the player can recognize the degree of expectation of a large number of rounds in the big hit game state by the color of the aura image 95. For example, the player can recognize that the number of rounds is greater when the aura image red 95D is displayed than when the aura image blue 95B is displayed.

  By executing the round number suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 20, the V winning aura image 95 is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 after the game medium has entered the specific area. Since the presentation mode of the predetermined production such as production is changed, the interest of the game can be improved by the production without the progress of the game being delayed.

  In addition, since the number-of-rounds suggestion effect by the V winning aura image 95 is executed in association with the fact that the V winning image is displayed and the effect of notifying the V winning is executed, the interest of the game is further improved by the effect. be able to.

  Further, since the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting effect by the V winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination prize winning device 87, the round number suggesting effect and V The player can be focused on the number of game balls that have entered the determination winning device 87.

  In addition, the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting production by the V winning aura image 95 depends on the number of rounds in the big hitting gaming state (advantage of the number of rounds) which is controlled based on the V winning in the small hitting gaming state. Since the player can recognize the number of rounds of the big hit, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game through the production.

  FIG. 21 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of the continuous holding notification effect. FIG. 22 is a timing chart of the suspended consecutive notification effect. With reference to FIG. 21 and FIG. 22, a hold consecutive notification effect as a special effect will be described. In FIG. 21, (A) to (D) show an example of the continuous holding notification effect according to the passage of time. In FIG. 22, the production control timing is shown during the period from the start of the small hitting game state to the beginning of the big hitting game state based on the V winning.

  In the pending storage, there is pending storage information that will be a big hit in the future in the pending storage information that exists when the big hit occurs, and it exists before the big hit occurs after the end of the big hit game state of the big hit. The next big hit occurs within the range of the pending storage information, and the next big hit continuously occurs within the range of the pending storage information that existed when the big hit occurred. It is a big hit. Since the small hit is a big hit via the small hit based on the occurrence of the V winning, the held storage information of the small hit is the held storage information to be a big hit in the future.

  In the holding sequence in this embodiment, the inside of the holding storage information of the second holding storage information at the time of a big hit in the time saving state (high base state) is determined. When the second reserved storage information is present, the second reserved storage information is used for the variable display with priority over the first reserved storage information. Therefore, in the time saving state (high base state), the reserved storage information of the second reserved storage information. If there is a small hit or a pattern big hit pending storage information, continuous big hits can occur, so these pending storage information are determined as the storage information of the pending series.

  After the small hitting game state is started as shown in FIG. 22, when a V winning occurs during execution of the process during open processing (S809) of FIG. 19, as shown in FIG. 21 (A) and FIG. On the effect display device 9, the V-shaped V winning image 94 is displayed for a relatively short predetermined period. As a result, V winning notification indicating that a V winning has occurred is given. When the suspension consecutive effects are executed, the following effects are executed over the small hit game state and the large hit game state.

  In the small hitting game state, when a predetermined time elapses after the occurrence of V winning, as shown in FIG. 21 (B) and FIG. 22, the entire screen of the effect display device 9 is changed to black (dark) and nothing is displayed. The blackout display that does not look like is displayed as a basic effect by the open processing (S809) and the small hit end processing (S810) of FIG. Instead of the effect, it is continuously executed until the end of the small hitting game state (first process of the holding continuous notification effect). The blackout display may be a difficult-to-see effect that changes the visibility of a predetermined image to a difficult-to-see state that is lower than the reference state, or an effect to surprise the player, for example, the entire display screen is black. Instead of darkening to a one-color image, a predetermined color image such as semi-transparent black is overlaid on the front side of the normally displayed effect image (effect image such as effect pattern, character, and background image) By doing so, an effect of reducing the lightness of the image on the entire display screen to darken the image as a whole or an effect of giving a special feeling to the player may be performed.

  Then, after the end of the small hit game state, by the big hit display process (S804) of FIG. 19, a fanfare effect at the start of a big hit that is executed as a basic effect (a big hit start notification is a broken line in the figure. 21) instead of (indicated by), the holding continuous notification as shown in FIG. 21 (C) or (D) and FIG. 22 is executed (second processing of the holding continuous notification effect). Specifically, when there are a total of three pieces of reservation storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and reservation storage information that is a specific small hit in the reservation storage information, “+ 3BONUS” as shown in FIG. 21C. By displaying the character "", the continuous holding notification is performed. When there are a total of four pieces of the held storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the held storage information that is a specific small hit in the held storage information, the character "+ 4BONUS" is displayed as shown in FIG. 21 (D). By doing so, the continuous holding notification is performed. Although illustration is omitted, when there are a total of two pieces of the reserved storage information that is a specific symbol big hit and the reserved storage information that is a specific small hit, the characters "+ 2BONUS" are displayed. By doing so, the continuous holding notification is performed. In this way, in the continuous holding notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of the held storage information that can be a big hit in the held storage information after the big hit game state is finished, and the number is notified.

  In this way, the number of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit, and the number of the held storage information determined to be the small hit are notified so that they can be specified in the holding continuous notification effect, so the holding storage advantageous for the player By allowing the player to specifically recognize the number of pieces of information, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game through the production.

  As shown in FIG. 22, such a holding continuous notification is executed until a specific period of time at the beginning of the production of the big hit game state, such as before the start of the first round of the big hit game. After the suspension continuous notification is executed, the effect of the first round in the jackpot gaming state is started by the processing during round (S805) of FIG. 19 as shown in, for example, FIG. In this way, the pending continuous notification effect is executed across the small hit game state and the big hit game state.

  The reason why the blackout display is executed when the continuous holding notification effect is executed is as follows. When the pending consecutive notification effect is executed, the round number suggesting effect shown in FIG. 20 is not executed. When the V-judgment winning device 87 of the deceleration structure described above is used, the game balls slowly flow down the passage on the V-judging winning device 87, so that a total of 10 is possible when the V-judging winning device 87 is open in a small hit. Regarding at what point in the opening times the V winning occurs, and at what point the upper limit number of ten game balls, which is the ending condition of the opening state, enters the V determination winning device 87. Variations occur with each occurrence of a small hit. As a result, the timing when the small hit game state ends varies depending on the occurrence of the small hit. When performing an effect in which the effect changes irregularly in accordance with the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87, as in the round number suggesting effect shown in FIG. 20, the player should feel uncomfortable. It will not be a directing. However, as a performance display during the period from the start of the small hitting game state to the end of the small hitting game state, for example, the story content in which the effect contents change with the passage of time, such as the ending after a certain period of time If it is assumed that a certain effect etc. is executed, there is a possibility that the effect state will be discomforting to the player, such as the effect state at the end of the small hit will be different for each occurrence of the small hit. It is difficult to make an adjustment to make the performance state uniform at the end of the small hit for each occurrence. Therefore, in order to execute the effect of the small hitting game that does not give the player a feeling of strangeness, the effect by the blackout display in which the effect contents do not change is executed. That is, the blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hitting game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to preferably execute the pending continuous notification effect regarding the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

  When a V prize occurs in the small hit game state, based on the fact that at least one of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit or the held storage information determined to be the small hit is included. Since the suspended consecutive notification effect can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  Further, when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state, the V winning notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, the continuous holding notification effect can be executed, so the V winning in the small hitting game state. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect when the occurrence occurs.

  Further, when a V winning occurs in the small hit game state, at least one of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit or the held storage information determined to be the small hit is included. Based on, it is possible to execute the pending continuous notification effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  In addition, in the hold continuous notification effect, different effects are executed according to the total number of held storage information that can be a big hit in the held storage information after the big hit game state is finished, and the number is notified. As a result, since the player can specifically recognize the number of pieces of reserved storage information that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by the effect.

  Further, in the continuous holding notification effect, for example, the total number of pieces of held storage information that can be a big hit in the held storage information, such as “+ 3BONUS” in FIG. 21C and “+ 4BONUS” in FIG. Which production mode is used to execute the pending consecutive notification production because the production mode of the special effect executed when the number is less than the predetermined number (3 or the like) is different from when the number is more than the predetermined number (4 or the like). The player can be paid attention to.

  In addition, in the pending consecutive notification effect of FIG. 21, an example in which the blackout display is executed after the V winning notification is executed for a short time is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the blackout display may be executed without the V winning notification. In the case of executing the held continuous notification effect, other images such as, for example, a predetermined still image or a moving image in which a repeating operation for a short period is executed may be displayed without executing the blackout display. Further, the blackout display period may be a fixed period. The holding continuous notification effect may be executed until during a big hit round effect after the end of the small hit game state. When the blackout display period is set to a fixed time when the pending consecutive notification production LA is executed until during the big hit round production, a blackout display for a fixed period is executed from the time of V winning, so that the black of the period is executed. The out display period may be a fixed period, or the end time of the blackout display may be indefinite until the big hit round performance is being performed. In addition, the suspension consecutive notification effect may be executed during the V winning, or may be executed during the opening period of the V determination winning device 87 after the V winning.

  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a data table used when selecting an effect mode of a round number suggesting effect. FIG. 23 (A) shows a V aura color change effect pattern table that stores a plurality of kinds of effect patterns for changing the color of the V winning aura image 95 in the round number suggesting effect. FIG. 23 (B) shows a V aura color change effect pattern selection table used for selecting an effect pattern for changing the color of the V winning aura image 95 in the round number suggesting effect.

  In FIG. 23 (A), in each effect pattern in which the effect patterns of the first pattern to the eighth pattern are shown, the number of prizes (1 to 10, etc.) to the V determination prize winning device 87 in the small hit game state. ), The color of the V winning aura image 95 is set. For example, in the sixth pattern, the 1st to 2nd colors are white, the 3rd to 6th colors are blue, the 7th to 8th colors are green, and the 9th to 10th colors are red. The data is set. The number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87 is the total value of the game balls detected by the V winning switch 87a and the V determination winning switch 15a. The value of the game ball detected by the V determination ejection switch 15b may be used as the number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87.

  Since the correspondence relationship of “white <blue <green <red <rainbow” is predetermined for the magnitude relationship of the expectation degree of the number of rounds, in each effect pattern, white → blue → as the winning number increases. A color change pattern is set so that the colors can change in the order of green → red. Iridescent is a color that includes other colors such as blue, green, and red. In this way, due to the effect pattern in which the number of rounds changes to a color with a high degree of expectation as the number of winnings increases, the player's expectation can be expected while the V determination winning device 87 is open in the small hitting game state. It can be increased, and it can be made difficult for the player to feel when the opening control is extended.

  Unlike the other effect patterns, the eighth pattern is an effect pattern in which the rainbow color is set for all of the first to tenth items and the color does not change and is fixed to the rainbow color. This is because the rainbow color is used as a special color that suggests that the 16 (15) R hour / hour / big hit via small hit has been determined. In addition, as an effect pattern that suggests that the short-time win 16 (15) R short-time win is confirmed, for example, an effect pattern in which colors can change in the order of white → blue → green → red → rainbow is used. Good.

  In FIG. 23 (B), there is shown a correspondence relationship between the types of small hit via big hit and the first to eighth patterns of FIG. 23 (A). In FIG. 23 (B), for the performance control, each of the 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit via the small hit, the 9 (8) R hour / hour big hit via the small hit, and the 5 (4) R hour / hour big hit via the small hit As one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100, a total of 100 numeric values of the random number SR2 (numeric value range of 0 to 99) for V combo effect pattern selection is assigned to each of the corresponding first pattern to eighth pattern. Has been.

  In FIG. 23 (B), in correspondence with the magnitude relationship of the expectation of a large number of rounds, that is, "white <blue <green <red <rainbow", "5 (4) R hourly short hit big hit <small hit" Via 9 (8) R hour / hour big hit <small hit 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit ”, so that the selection rate of the effect pattern with a high expected number of rounds for the final 10th color is high. Data is set to. In FIG. 23 (B), the eighth pattern is set to be selectable only in the case of 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit via small hit. As a result, when the round number suggesting effect is executed in the eighth pattern (all of the first to tenth are iridescent), it is determined that the 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit via small hit is determined. It becomes possible to suggest. The eighth pattern may be selectable for the big hits other than the 16 (15) R short-time big hit via the small hit.

  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a holding continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table. The hold consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table is stored in the ROM 102.

  In the reservation consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table of FIG. 24, for the case of the symbol 15R hour / hour big hit, and when the total number of held consecutive pieces of 16 (15) R hour / hour big hit is 0 to 4 respectively, for effect control A total of 150 numeric values of the random number SR2 (numerical value range of 0 to 149) for determining the presence / absence of pending continuous notification, which is one of the random numbers updated by the microcomputer 100, is “executed (executed)” and “not executed”. (Do not execute) ”.

  In this way, the pending continuous notification effect can be executed with the pending storage information that can be a big hit when the special winning opening is opened 15 times. It should be noted that the pending continuous notification effect may be executable for the pending storage information that can be another type of big hit. In the pending continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, data is set such that when the target pending storage information is 0 or 1, “execution is performed” is not determined, and only “no execution” is determined. Has been done.

  In addition, in the pending continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, data is set such that “execution is possible” can be determined when the total of the pending storage information to be targeted is two or more, and is targeted. The data is set such that the larger the number of pieces of pending storage information is, the higher the ratio of “executed” is determined. Thereby, depending on the number of pieces of pending storage information that can be a big hit, which is an advantageous number of rounds for the player, such as the symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot and the small hit via 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot, the pending consecutive notification effect is executed. Since the ratios are different, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how many big hits, which are advantageous round numbers, are executed when the held consecutive notification effect is executed.

  Furthermore, since the player can recognize that there are a plurality of pieces of held storage information that can be a big hit when the held consecutive notification effect is executed, the entertainment of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  Further, in the holding consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table, among the types of big hits, when the total number of holding consecutive numbers of the symbol 15R hour short and big hit and the small hit via 16 (15) R hour short big hit is two or more, the pending consecutive notification effect is generated. The data is set to run. As a result, when the holding continuous notification effect is executed, a plurality of holding storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous to the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types is stored. By being able to recognize, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  Further, as the execution target of the holding continuous notification effect, since the holding storage information that can be a big hit with a relatively large number of rounds such as the symbol 15R hour / hour jackpot and the 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot is used, the held consecutive notification effect is When executed, the player naturally has a high expectation of being in the big hit game state in which the special winning opening is opened 15 times, which is most advantageous to the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved by the production.

  Next, a description will be given of a process for selecting a pending consecutive / round number suggesting effect for determining whether or not to execute the pending consecutive notification effect and the round number suggesting effect and selecting an effect type. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the reservation consecutive / round number suggesting effect selection process.

  The holding consecutive / round number suggesting effect selection process of FIG. 25 is included in the process of setting various effects in the effect symbol variation start process (S801 of FIG. 19). In the pending consecutive / round number suggesting effect selection processing, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display executed this time is the small hit display result based on the display result designation command received at the time of this change (display The result may be determined based on the identifiable variation pattern command) (S851). The received display result designation command is stored in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the storage area of the RAM 103, and determines whether or not it is a small hit display result depending on whether or not a command for designating the small hit display result is stored in the area indicating the variable display executed this time. To judge.

  If the small hit display result is not obtained in S851, the process ends. On the other hand, when the small hit display result is obtained in S851, the current second hold storage information (the hold storage information based on the second start winning combination into the second start winning opening 14) stored in the prefetching process (S501) of FIG. ) Is acquired (S852). Then, based on the acquired second hold storage information, it is confirmed whether or not there is hold storage information that is a design big hit (symbol 15R time-short big hit) that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect (S853), and the target of the hold continuous notification effect. It is confirmed that there is a small hit (possibly a short time big hit via small hit 16 (15) R) and whether or not there is pending storage information (S854). Next, SR2 is extracted, and based on the confirmation information in S853 and S854, using the holding continuous notification effect presence / absence determination table, the pending continuous notification effect is executed based on the pending storage information in the current second pending storage information. It is determined whether or not to execute (presence or absence of execution) (S855).

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the player is controlled to the small hitting game state, if the player makes a right hit in accordance with the right hitting promotion notification, a V prize is generated with a probability of about 100% and is controlled to the big hit game state. Therefore, the pending storage information for the small hit is also determined as the pending storage information for the pending string together with the pending storage information for the big hit.

  When it is determined in S855 to execute the held consecutive notification effect, the held consecutive notification effect information (for example, notification target hold) is data to be used when executing the held consecutive notification effect corresponding to the current variable display. The number of consecutive pieces, the presence / absence of execution of the held consecutive notice effect, etc.) are stored in a predetermined effect data storage area (S857), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S855 that the held consecutive notification effect is not executed, it is determined that the round suggestion effect (color change effect of the aura image) is executed (S858). Next, based on the display result designation command confirmed in S851, while confirming the type of the small hit via big hit, SR3 is extracted and executed using the V aura color change effect pattern selection table of FIG. 23 (B). A production pattern of a round suggestive production is selected and determined (S859). Then, as the data to be used when executing the round suggestion effect with the decided effect pattern, the effect pattern data stored in the V aura color change effect pattern table in FIG. The effect information (for example, the number-of-rounds suggesting effect pattern, the presence / absence of the number-of-rounds suggesting effect, etc.) is stored in the specific effect data storage area (S860), and the process ends.

  When it is determined that the pending continuous notification effect is to be executed when the variable display is the small hit display result, the pending continuous notification effect is executed based on the data stored in S857. On the other hand, when the variable display is the small hit display result, if it is determined not to execute the held continuous notification effect, the round number suggesting effect is executed based on the data stored in S860. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine that does not have the pending consecutive notification effect, S858 may be executed after S855.

  The number-of-rounds suggestion effect may be executed also when the held consecutive notification effect is executed. In addition, the number-of-rounds suggestive effect is not always executed when the held consecutive notice effect is not executed, but when the held consecutive notice effect is not executed, it is determined whether or not the round number suggestive effect is executed by a predetermined lottery. You may. Further, whether or not to execute the round number suggesting effect is determined by a predetermined lottery, and when it is determined to execute the round number suggesting effect, the hold consecutive notification effect may not be executed. As described above, either one of the pending continuous notification effect and the round number suggesting effect may be executed with priority, or both may be executed without prioritizing either.

  Next, a round number suggesting effect process for executing the above-described round number suggesting effect will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the round number suggesting effect process. The number-of-rounds suggestion effect process of FIG. 26 is configured and executed as a part of the process during opening of the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

  In the number-of-rounds suggesting effect process, first, the number-of-rounds suggesting effect information (round number suggesting effect pattern, presence / absence of execution of the number suggesting rounds, etc.) stored in S860 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S840). Next, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the round number suggesting effect based on the information regarding the presence / absence of execution of the round number suggesting effect acquired in S840 (S841). If it is not determined in S841 that the round number suggesting effect is to be executed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S841 that the round number suggesting effect is to be executed, it is when the V specific winning ball detection designating command output when the game ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 is detected. It is confirmed whether or not (S842).

  If the command is not received in S842, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is time to receive the command in S842, the winning number counter as a counting means for counting the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 is updated by incrementing by 1 (S843). Then, the aura image 95 is displayed in a color corresponding to the number counted by the updated winning number counter based on the effect pattern of the round number suggesting effect acquired in S840 (S843). By displaying the aura image 95 in a color corresponding to the number in S843, a round number suggesting effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 is executed. It will be. The V winning image 94 is started to be displayed on the basis of the reception of the V winning designation command in the processing for opening the small hit effect (S809), and immediately after the V winning occurs, the V specific winning ball is generated. Since the detection designation command is received, in S843, the aura image 95 corresponding to the V winning image 94 is displayed in the color determined in S844 immediately after the V winning occurs. As a result, a round number suggesting effect in which the color of the aura image 95 can be changed is executed as shown in FIGS.

  Next, a description will be given of a first process of the holding consecutive notice effect for executing the above-mentioned holding consecutive notice effect during the small hit game. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing the pending continuous notification effect first process. The holding continuous notification effect first process of FIG. 27 is configured and executed as a part of the process of opening the small hit effect (S809 of FIG. 19).

  In the 1st process of holding continuous notification effect, first, the holding continuous notification effect information (the number of notification target pending continuous operations, the presence or absence of the pending continuous notification effect, etc.) stored in S857 of FIG. 25 is acquired (S861). Next, based on the information regarding the presence / absence of execution of the continuous holding notification effect acquired in S861, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the continuous holding notification effect (S862). If it is not determined in S862 that the pending continuous notification effect is to be executed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S862 that the pending consecutive notification effect is to be executed, the V-winning ball transmitted to the V-winning area 870 of the V-judgment winning device 87 is detected by the V-winning switch 87a. It is determined whether a predetermined period has elapsed after the detection designation command was received (S863).

  If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the reception of the V winning detection designation command in S863, the process ends. On the other hand, when the predetermined period has elapsed after the V winning detection designation command is received in S863, the process of opening the small hit production (S809) and the small hit are performed based on the information about the number of notification-holding consecutive stations acquired in S861. The blackout display that is executed until the end processing (S810) is completed is started (S864), and the processing is completed. Thereby, the blackout display as shown in FIG. 21 (B) is executed until the end of the small hit game.

  Next, a description will be given of a second process of the continuous holding notification effect which is executed during the big hit display of the continuous holding notification effect. FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing the second holding continuous notification effect process. The held continuous notification effect second process of FIG. 28 is configured and executed as a part of the big hit display process (S804 of FIG. 19) of the big hit effect.

  In the second process of holding continuous notification effect, first, the holding continuous notification effect information stored in S857 of FIG. 25 (the number of notification target pending continuous calls, the presence or absence of execution of the pending continuous notification effect, etc.) is acquired (S871). Next, based on the information regarding the presence / absence of execution of the continuous holding notification effect acquired in S871, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the continuous holding notification effect (S872). If it is not determined in S872 that the pending continuous notification effect is to be executed, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S872 that the holding consecutive notification effect is to be executed, + 2BONUS (in the case of two target holding consecutive numbers is set as the holding consecutive notification mode based on the information regarding the notification subject holding consecutive number acquired in S871). ), + 3BONUS (when the number of target holding stations is 3), or + 4BONUS (when the number of target holding stations is 4) is selected (S873). Then, in the pending continuous notification mode selected in S873, execution of the pending continuous notification is started for a predetermined period of time during the big hit display effect period. Thereby, for example, the continuous holding notification as shown in FIGS. 21C and 21D is executed.

[Modified Example of Producing Suspended Announcement with V-Award Image Aura Color]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the suspended consecutive notification effect is produced by the V winning image aura color. In FIG. 21, an example is shown in which the holding continuous notification effect is executed by character information such as “+ 3BONUS”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect may be performed using the aura image 95 capable of color change as shown in FIG.

  As the holding consecutive notification effect using the aura image 95, the aura image 95 displayed along with the V winning image 94 is displayed, for example, in response to an increase in the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87. As described above, the color of the aura image 95 may be changed, and an effect of setting the color of the aura image 95 to a specific color such as a rainbow color may be performed as the above-mentioned continuous notification of reservation. Such a continuous holding notification effect displays an aura image based on the fact that the held storage information includes at least one of the held storage information that is a symbol big hit and the held storage information that is a small hit. It is only necessary to execute the hold continuous notification effect by making it possible to change the effect mode of such a predetermined effect to the specific mode.

  If such a holding continuous notification effect is executed, based on the fact that the holding storage information includes at least one of the holding storage information that is a symbol big hit and the holding storage information that is a small hit, Since the effect mode of the effect of displaying the image can be changed to the specific mode, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the reserved memory information includes the reserved memory information which is a big hit through the symbol big hit or the small hit. As a result, the interest of the game can be further improved by the production.

[Modification Example of Change in Performance Mode of Suspend Continuous Notification Performance]
Next, when executing the holding continuous notification effect, when there are a plurality of total numbers of holding storage information that is a symbol big hit and holding storage information that is a small hit via big hit, and only holding storage information that is a small hit via big hit. An example in which the production mode of the pending continuous notification production is different from the case where there are a plurality of cases will be described.

  For the second pending storage information when the big hit gaming state, for the first holding series type where there is only the pending storage information that is a symbol big hit, and the pending storage information and the small jackpot (which is a small jackpot) There may be a case of the second holding continuous type in which both of the held storage information that is a big hit exist, and a case of the third holding continuous type in which only a small hit (big hit via big hit) exists. Such a plurality of types of holding consecutives are all called holding consecutives, but when notifying that there is a holding consecutive as the holding consecutive notification effect, the holding consecutive notification is performed in a different manner depending on the holding consecutive type. May be executed. For example, in the case of the first holding series type, the holding series notification is made with a katakana such as “+3 bonus”, and in the case of the second holding series type, the holding series notification is made with English characters such as “+ 3BONUS”, In the case of the third hold series type, the hold series notification may be made using a hiragana such as “+3 bonus”. In addition, when notifying that there is a holding sequence, an image such as a character relating to the holding sequence notification may be displayed in a different color according to the holding sequence type. In addition, when notifying that there is a holding sequence, a different character image is displayed according to the holding sequence type (either a display associated with the number of holding sequences or a single character image display may be performed) to notify the holding sequence. You may make it display the image, such as a character regarding. In addition, for each of the first to third holding continuous types, a rendering mode such as “+3 bonus”, a rendering mode such as “+ 3BONUS”, and a plurality of types such as “+3 bonus” From the effect modes, the effect modes may be selected and determined by lottery. In that case, the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed may be different for each of the first to third holding continuous types.

  By executing such a holding continuous notification effect, it is possible to change the effect mode of the pending continuous notification effect to be executed according to the holding continuous type, so that the holding continuous notification effect is executed in any of the effect modes. You can draw the player's attention to Rika. In addition, in each of the first holding continuous type to the third holding continuous type, when the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is made different, in which effect mode the held alarm notification effect is executed. Can make people pay attention.

  [Modified Example of Performing Restriction Control of Suspended Continuous Notification Effect] Next, after executing the suspended serial notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of suspended serial notifications, all the pending storage information targeted for the suspended serial notification effect is exhausted. An example of limiting (prohibiting) the execution of the held continuous notification effect until the operation is performed will be described.

  In the second hold storage information when the big hit game state, when executing the hold consecutive notification effect when there are a plurality of hold storage information that is a symbol big hit and a small hit (big hit via the small hit) In, the big hit game state in which the holding series notification effect is executed, the big hit which is the holding series notification target is executed, and even in the big hit game state, when the holding series notification effect is executed, the holding series Whether the notification effect is continuously executed with the pending storage information of the pending series that was the notification target in the previous big hit game state, or the pending storage information of the pending series based on the newly generated pending storage information As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is newly executed, resulting in an unclear effect.

  Therefore, after executing the held consecutive notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of held consecutive notifications, the execution of the held consecutive notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all the held storage information targeted for the held consecutive notification effect is exhausted. It suffices to execute the effect control. After the pending consecutive notification effect is executed, the pending consecutive restriction flag is set and new pending storage information is confirmed until the variable display based on all the pending storage information targeted for the notice consecutive notification is executed. The execution of the effect control process may be restricted so that the process for executing the continuous holding notification is not executed. By doing this, after executing the held consecutive notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of held consecutive times, the execution of the held consecutive notice effect is executed until all the held storage information that is the target of the held consecutive notification effect is exhausted. By being prohibited, new execution of the pending continuous notification effect is restricted, and thus it is possible to clarify which of the pending storage information is the notification target of the pending continuous notification effect.

  In addition, after executing the held consecutive notification effect for notifying that there are a plurality of held consecutive notifications, the execution of the held consecutive notification effect is restricted (prohibited) until all the held storage information targeted for the held consecutive notification effect is exhausted. For example, the following effects may be executed.

  For example, after executing the held-reel notification effect that notifies that there are a plurality of held reams, the number of held reams is displayed so that it can be specified by the number of stock images such as icon images, and this is the target of the held-repair notification effect. It may be possible to reduce the number of icon images each time the jackpot gaming state is exhausted. Furthermore, when performing the continuous notification of the hold based on the newly generated hold storage information, such an icon image may be added. In this way, by visualizing the number of notification objects of the pending series so that the player can recognize it, it becomes possible to execute the pending series notification effect that the player can easily understand. Further, if such an effect is executed, after executing the held consecutive notification effect, rather than limiting the execution of the held consecutive notification effect until all of the held storage information targeted for the held consecutive notification effect is exhausted. Also, the frequency of recognition of the continuous holding notification effect by the player becomes high, and an interesting effect can be executed.

[Modified Example of Execution Timing of Suspended Notification Information]
Next, an example will be described in which the above-mentioned holding continuous notification effect is executed during the V-combo effect (VCOMBO effect). V combo production, when it becomes "symbol big hit" or "big hit via small hit" based on the winning in the second starting winning opening 14, during a predetermined period between predetermined rounds during the big hit gaming state , Is an effect of notifying the number of paid-out prize balls (value added) in a jackpot gaming state in a predetermined stage, and is mainly an effect of notifying the paid-out number of prize balls in a plurality of steps in stages.

[Examples of specific effects during variable display after a big hit]
Next, during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time-short hit, which is caused by the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of the reserved memory information and the prefetch judgment of the reserved memory information are determined. Based on the result, the specific effect of performing the big hit pre-reading effect in the pending storage information will be described.

  FIG. 29 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing an effect image of a specific effect. FIG. 30 is a timing chart of the specific effect. The specific effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  In FIG. 29, an example of the specific effect is shown according to the passage of time, and images having little relation to the specific effect are omitted. In FIG. 30, while showing an effect that matches the effect content of the specific effect of FIG. 29, and in order to show the overall control image of the specific effect in an easy-to-understand manner, a single variable display after the end of the 4R symbol time junior big hit is displayed. The example performed by the variable display by the 2nd special symbol is shown. In addition, in FIG. 30, four pieces of the second reserved memory information are accumulated during the winning promotion effect, and the second reserved memory that is a big jackpot via the symbol big hit or the small hit in the second reserved memory information up to the third piece. Information was not included (for example, if the 4th second reserved memory information includes a big jackpot or a big hit via a small hit, and the 4th second reserved memory information, a symbol jackpot) Either the case where the big hit via the small hit is not included), an example is shown in which, after the end of the change display, all the four change displays accumulated during the winning promotion performance are sequentially executed. There is.

  29 (A) to (O) and FIG. 30 show an example of the specific effect. After the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time-short big hit, in the period until the second special symbol is variably displayed once, it becomes a high base state by executing the electric Chu support control, so the variable winning ball device 15 Winning a prize for (Den Chu) is facilitated. Therefore, it becomes easy to accumulate the second hold storage information by winning the variable winning ball device 15. As for the second reserved memory information, since the winning probability of the small hit that can be a big hit via the small hit is about 1/7, which is a high probability, the small hit among the maximum four pieces of the second reserved memory information. Reservation storage information, which is a big hit via the route, may be included with a relatively high frequency.

  As an effect corresponding to the mechanism of such a game control, during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R hour-short win, during the first variable display, the prefetch effect with the second hold storage information as the target of prefetching The specific effect as is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, at the start of the specific effect, the effect display device 9 performs the specific effect start effect of displaying the specific effect start image 9A indicating the start of the specific effect such as “start of final determination”. At the same time, the display of a determination effect moving image (not shown) that is a moving image such as a predetermined movie image is started. The determination effect video is, for example, a movie video with a series of stories such as a battle effect in which an ally (player's ally) character and an enemy character battle each other as a background moving image and ends from the start of the specific effect. It is continuously displayed until the time. The specific effect start effect is executed for the first predetermined period so that the player can easily recognize that the specific effect is executed.

  The left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, 93 are variably displayed in a variable display mode of small symbols that are variably displayed in a reduced mode in the upper right corner of the screen. The downward arrow in the figure indicates that the variable display is in progress.

  When the determination start effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the effect display device 9, a prize promotion for promoting the prize winning of the game ball to the variable prize ball device 15 such as "store the reserve!" The winning promotion effect for displaying the image 9B is executed. The winning promotion effect is an effect that promotes the winning of the game ball into the variable winning ball device 15, and is an effect that promotes the accumulation of the second hold storage information. In this embodiment, a "promote reserves" prize winning promotion image is displayed in order to promote the accumulation of the second pending storage information, but the winning of game balls to the variable winning ball device 15 is promoted. In that sense, it is possible to execute a winning promotion effect that displays a winning promotion image in which a specific winning portion such as “Let's win a prize in Den!” Is specified.

  In the winning promotion effect, for example, the second predetermined period required from when the number of the second hold storage information is “0” to when it is the maximum “4” is set as the longest period, Even during the second predetermined period, when the number of the second hold storage information becomes the maximum "4", it ends at that time in order to suppress the subsequent useless game ball firing.

  After the execution of the winning promotion effect, a change effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect according to the number of the second hold storage information can be executed. Specifically, when the second hold storage information is “0”, as shown in FIG. 29C, left, middle, and right effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the current variation display (the variation display). As the image of, the image of the effect design (hereinafter referred to as the reach pattern) in which the reach mode (7 ↓ 7) is formed with the pattern of “7” is displayed in the center part of the screen. As shown in FIGS. 29C to 29G, the winning promotion image 9B is continuously displayed in the upper left corner of the screen in a reduced mode until the number of the second held storage information reaches the upper limit number (4). It The prize winning promotion image 9B is erased immediately after the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4) as shown in FIG.

  When the first second hold storage information occurs when the second hold storage information is “0”, the hold first change effect for changing the effect mode is executed as illustrated in FIG. 29D. It In the first hold pending change effect, one reach symbol is added in response to the increase in the number of second retained memories, and the reach symbols are displayed in a manner of arranging two reach downward from the upper center of the screen in a reduced aspect. The effect image is changed to the effect. In FIG. 29 (D), the top reach symbol indicates the currently changing effect symbols 91, 92, 93, and the second reach symbol indicates the look-ahead effect symbol 94 corresponding to the first reserved item. .. The image of the effect design in which the reach pattern is formed is called a reach line. In this way, when the first piece of the second reserved storage information is generated, as shown in FIG. 29 (D), effect control for changing the number of reach lines to two (2 lines) is executed. The effect of increasing the display of the look-ahead effect design 94 including such reach patterns is called a reach line increase effect.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (E), when the second second hold storage information is generated and the second hold storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect design 94 including the reach symbol of the corresponding “7” is first. The second hold change effect for changing the effect mode is executed by additionally displaying below the prefetch effect pattern 94 displayed in No. 3 and increasing the number of reach lines (3 lines in total). As shown in FIG. 29 (F), when the third second hold storage information occurs and the second hold storage information increases, the look-ahead effect design 94 including the corresponding reach symbol of "7" is first. The hold third third change effect is executed in which the effect mode is changed by additionally displaying below the look-ahead effect pattern 94 displayed in (1) and increasing the number of reach lines (total of 4 lines). As shown in FIG. 29 (G), when the fourth second reserved storage information is generated and the second reserved storage information is increased, the look-ahead effect design 94 including the corresponding reach symbol "7" is first. The fourth holding change effect is executed which is additionally displayed under the prefetch effect design 94 displayed in No. 1 and is increased in number of reach lines (total 5 lines) to change the effect mode.

  As described above, in the specific effect, the change effect that changes the effect mode to increase the number of reach lines by displaying the look-ahead effect symbol 94 including the reach symbol in response to the increase in the number of the second held storage information is increased. Done. The following display intention is to increase the number of reach lines of the look-ahead effect design 94 including the reach pattern of "7", which is displayed in association with the increase in the number of the second reserved storage information in the specific effect. There is.

  First, in the variable display other than the variable display in which the specific effect is executed, the reach pattern when the effect control microcomputer 100 sets the reach display mode for the effect symbol is, for example, “7 symbols> 3 symbols> other numbers. Due to the relationship such as “design”, selection is determined so that the degree of expectation of a big hit is different. Therefore, the player's expectation for a big hit is highest when the reach symbol of "7" is reached among the reach symbols selected from a plurality of types. Therefore, in the specific effect, each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 of the variable display is a reach symbol of "7" from the viewpoint of a high degree of expectation of a big hit depending on the type of reach symbol. It is displayed by. As a result, in the specific effect, by displaying each of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 of the variable display with the reach symbol of "7" that the player feels advantageous, the player can win the big hit. Expectations can be increased. Further, in the specific effect, the effect that the number of reach lines is increased by the reach pattern of "7" can further enhance the player's expectation for a big hit.

  As the reach symbol used for the reach line number increasing effect in the specific effect, a symbol other than “7” may be used. For example, a symbol (characters that suggest a advantageous state for the player such as a big hit rush, a small hit rush, a rush in a short time state (electric power support state), etc.) (in a normal variable display) It is also possible to use a special production-specific pattern that is not used.

  Further, the reach symbol “3” may be used. The reason is as follows. In a pachinko gaming machine, generally, a reach pattern of "7" has a high expectation of being a big hit, a high expectation of having the maximum number of rounds when a big hit occurs, and a jackpot after the game state is over. It is used as a symbol that the player expects to have a high degree of expectation that it will be in an advantageous state for the player (time saving state, electric power support state, probability variation state in a game machine that is a probability variation state, etc.). For example, the reach pattern when the reach display mode for the effect symbol is, for example, "7 symbols> 3 symbols> other numerical symbols" has a relationship such that the maximum round number when the jackpot is reached is expected. There is a case where the setting is made so that the selection is determined differently. As a result, it is expected that a general player has an expectation that the number of rounds when a big hit occurs will be a big hit of the maximum round when the reach symbol of "7" is displayed.

  Depending on the distribution of the number of rounds when it becomes a big hit, the distribution of the big hit type generated by the variable display of the first special symbol and the distribution of the big hit type generated by the variable display of the second special symbol are the big hits of the maximum round number. In some cases, the selection ratio of types is set lower than the selection ratio of jackpot types other than the maximum number of rounds. In such a case, when the big hit is made based on the reach pattern of "7" which also has the meaning of suggesting the big hit of the maximum round number in the specific effect, the big hit type of the round number other than the maximum round number is selected. In some cases, Sense that the jackpot based on the reach symbol of "7" is the maximum number of rounds when the jackpot type other than the maximum number of rounds is selected even though the jackpot is based on the reach symbol of "7" When the player has, the player's sense may not match the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In order to prevent such a sense inconsistency, the above-mentioned expected number of rounds, which is the maximum number of rounds, is smaller than "7", and the symbol "3", which has a higher jackpot expectation than other numerical symbols, is specified. May be used as a reach pattern for forming a reach line.

  Further, as the reach line increase effect by the reach pattern in the specific effect, the reach selected from the symbols of "7", the symbol of "3", and the other symbols at a predetermined ratio according to the degree of expectation to be a big hit. You may form the reach line by a design. In that case, depending on the type of reach symbol displayed as the reach line, the above-described expectation to the big hit and expectation to the maximum number of rounds of the big hit may be varied. By doing so, the variety of reach patterns on the reach line is enriched, and the player can recognize the degree of expectation that the respective second hold storage information and the like will be a big hit, so that the fun of the effect is improved.

  In addition, such a special effect, the first special display as the first variable display after the end of the symbol 4R time junior big hit game state, other than the first variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the symbol 4R time junior big hit game state It may be executed when variable display of symbols is executed. Further, such a specific effect may be executed in a variable display at a predetermined timing after the end of the big hitting gaming state of the big hitting other than the symbol 4R time saving big hitting.

  When the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit value or when the second predetermined period elapses after the winning promotion effect is started, the winning promotion effect is finished and shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to (J). A suggestive effect is executed to indicate whether or not such a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R hour / hour big hit). If the number of the second hold storage information reaches the upper limit value before the second predetermined period elapses during the execution period of the winning promotion effect, the effect is not advanced until the suggestion effect execution start timing is reached. It becomes a waiting period to wait for the passage of. Since the start timing of the suggested effect is set to a fixed timing in advance, such a waiting period is provided for the winning promotion effect. The standby period is not a period for executing a special effect, but a period for waiting for the progress of the effect (note that during the standby period, a predetermined effect such as an effect indicating that the second pending storage information has become full). You may display the effect image of). In the suggestive effect, as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to (J), the display results are derived and displayed in order from the top in the reach line arranged in the up-down direction corresponding to the variable display and the second hold storage information. To go. Specifically, the reach in the order of the current fluctuation (referred to as “variation”) → first reserved memory information → second reserved memory information → third reserved memory information → fourth reserved memory information. A combination of stop symbols is shown for each line. A combination of such stop symbols is also called a suggestive effect symbol.

  Regarding each of the variation display and the stored second reserved storage information, when the small hit (big hit via small hit) or the big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit) is not obtained, FIG. 29 (H), (I) As shown in, the corresponding reach symbol is displayed as a suggestive effect symbol which is stopped by the combination of the detached symbols (the combination in which the “7” symbols are not aligned). In FIG. 29 (J), a display example is shown when the second second held storage information is a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R short time big hit).

  For each of the variable display and the stored second held storage information, when a small hit (big hit via small hit) or big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit), for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (J) , The corresponding reach symbol stops at the combination of the jackpot symbols (the combination in which the symbols of "7" are aligned), and is enlarged and emphasized. The symbol combination in which the three symbols are prepared is associated with a state advantageous to the player (a big hit, etc.). As a result, during the variable display, for each of the variable display and the stored second holding storage information, a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit) advantageous to the player Is suggested.

  In this way, in the suggestive effect, by displaying a symbol combination image that is associated with a state advantageous to the player before it becomes a realistic jackpot, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the jackpot. By displaying a symbol combination image that suggests a big hit from the timing before the variable display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the player is relieved at an early timing and the interest of the player is raised from the early timing. be able to. The suggestive effect period for performing such suggestive effect is set to be executed in a common constant effect period regardless of the number of reach lines.

  In the suggestive effect, if there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via small hits) or big hits (symbol 15R short-time big hits) among the variable display and the stored second holding storage information, it is dealt with. Each of the plurality of reach symbols is stopped by a combination of jackpot symbols (a combination in which the symbols of "7" are aligned), and is enlarged and highlighted.

  In addition, if there are a plurality of small hits (big hits via small hits) or big hits (symbol 15R short-time big hits) among the variable display and the stored second held storage information, small hits (small hits) The one that has the earlier timing of becoming a big hit via the way) or a big hit (Symbol 15R time-short big hit) (for example, the second reserved memory information of the second piece and the second reserved memory information of the third piece is a small hit or a big hit). In some cases, only the one corresponding to the second second reserved storage information) is targeted, and the corresponding reach symbol is stopped by the combination of the jackpot symbols (the combination in which the symbols of "7" are gathered), and enlarged. You may make it emphasized.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (J), the symbols stopped and displayed in the combination of the big hit symbols in which the symbols of “7” are arranged are the big hits or the big hits through the small hits or the big hits (the symbols) based on the corresponding variable display or the pending storage information. It is an image that indicates in advance that a 15R hour / hour jackpot) will occur, and thereafter, until the corresponding variable display (variable display concerned or variable display based on pending storage information) is executed and the display result is derived and displayed, It is continuously displayed as an image suggesting (notifying) that the player will be in an advantageous state.

  After the suggestive effect is executed, at the end of the variable display, the following display is performed. In the suggestion production, the variable display does not become a big hit or a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time junior big hit), but the second pending storage information shows a big hit or a big hit via a small hit or a big hit (design 15R time junior big hit) stored memory information. When included, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), the look-ahead effect design 94 corresponding to the second hold storage information stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols is displayed in the center of the screen as a suggestion effect design, and the variable display is performed. The variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.

  Also, in the suggestive effect, the variable display is a big hit or a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time, short big hit), and the second hold storage information the variable display is a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time, short big hit) When the stored information is not included, the variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the variable display stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols is displayed at the center of the screen.

  Further, in the suggestion effect, the variable display is a big hit or a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time junior big hit), and the second hold storage information is a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (design 15R time junior big hit) holding memory information. When included, the variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the variable display stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols, and the look-ahead effect symbol corresponding to the second reserved storage information stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols. The 94 variable display results are displayed in the center of the screen.

  In the variable display based on the second hold storage information after the suggestion effect is finished, the effect of displaying (notifying) that it will be a big hit as a main symbol, while displaying (notifying) that it will be a small symbol is executed It may be done.

  In the suggestion production, the variable display does not become a big hit or a big hit via the small hit or a big hit (symbol 15R time junior big hit), but the second pending storage information shows a big hit or a big hit via a small hit or a big hit (design 15R time junior big hit) stored memory information. When it is not included, at the end of the series of suggestive effects, the reach symbol deviating symbol combination, which is the reach symbol deviating symbol combination, is displayed at the center of the screen.

  When there are a plurality of suggestive effect designs 94 stopped in the combination of the big hit symbols in the suggestive effect, a plurality of prefetch effect designs 94 are displayed in the combination of the big hit symbols at the end of the variable display. When there are a plurality of look-ahead effect designs 94 stopped by a combination of big hit symbols in the suggested effect, one look-ahead effect effect symbol 94 may be displayed as a representative image in a combination of big hit symbols at the end of the variable display. ..

  After the variable display becomes a display result that is off, as shown in FIGS. 29L to 29O, the variable display is sequentially executed for the second pending storage information that is the target of the specific effect. FIG. 29 is an example in which it is suggested that the second reserved storage information of the second piece is a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit) in the suggestion effect. In that case, FIG. The state in which the look-ahead effect design 94 corresponding to the second hold storage information stopped by the combination of the big hit symbols shown in FIG. 29 (K) is displayed in the center of the screen is continued, and as shown in FIGS. 29 (L) to (O). The variable display of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 corresponding to the respective pieces of reserved storage information itself is executed in a reduced mode (small symbol mode) in the lower right corner of the screen.

  In the specific effect, when the look-ahead effect design 94 is subjected to variable display of the second reserved storage information (in this example, the second reserved storage information) for which the jackpot pattern is to be combined, FIG. 29 (O) is displayed. As described above, the display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 variably displayed in the lower right corner of the screen becomes a big hit display result, and the look-ahead effect symbol 94 continuously displayed in the center part of the screen is enlarged and emphasized. .. As a result, in the specific effect, an effect of notifying that the small hit (big hit via small hit) or the big hit (symbol 15R short time big hit) suggested in the suggestion effect is performed is performed. The determination effect moving image continuously displayed as a series of movie images from the start of the specific effect is ended when the big hit display is executed and the specific effect is ended, as shown in FIG. 29 (O). It

  By executing such a specific effect, as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, the change effect is executed in accordance with the number of pieces of storage information stored when the specific effect is executed, and the change of the specific effect is performed. By changing the effect mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game due to the fun of the effect.

  As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, the change effect in the specific effect and the hold effect are executed by executing the change effect in association with the increase in the number of held storage information due to the winning promotion effect. It is possible to allow the player to clearly recognize the relationship with the number of stored information. Further, it is possible to prevent the production from ending without the change production being executed in the specific production.

  As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, as the change effect in the specific effect, the change is performed by executing the reach line increase effect that increases the number of reach lines in accordance with the increase in the number of the second hold storage information. It is possible to make the relationship between the effect and the number of the second hold storage information easier to visually understand.

  As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, as a change effect in the specific effect, the number of reach lines of the same “7” symbol is increased in accordance with the increase in the number of held storage information, thereby changing the reach mode type. Accordingly, it is not necessary to consider a production pattern relating to the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player such that the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player is changed. Therefore, development control of production control can be facilitated. Further, as the number of reach symbols increases, the player comes to pay attention to the specific effect with a certain expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 30, the suggestion production period can be executed in the same production period regardless of the number of reach lines, whereby the development control of production control can be facilitated.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 (G) and (H), the winning promotion effect is suppressed when the number of pieces of the second pending storage information reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), thereby suppressing unnecessary unnecessary promotion effects. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the production.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 (A) to 29 (O), a specific effect is executed in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of pieces of pending storage information by an effect using a series of images such as a determination effect animation, so that a game is performed by the effect. The interest of can be improved.

  In the specific effects shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30, in the suggestion effect, the effect patterns 91, 92, 93 in the reach mode and the suggestion effect pattern 94 are not stopped in a predetermined order as the effect. You may perform the effect of stopping at the same time once.

  Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the effect patterns 91, 92, 93 and the suggestive effect pattern 94 in the reach mode are stopped by the suggestive effect, the operation means image such as the button image is displayed. It is displayed, and an operation prompting display such as a "press" image is displayed, and the suggestive effect design 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order according to the operation of the player (operation of the push button 120 or the like), or once. You may make an effect to stop at the same time.

  Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, when the effect patterns 91, 92, 93 and the suggestive effect pattern 94 in the reach mode are stopped by the suggestive effect, the operation means image such as the button image is displayed. There is a case where it is displayed and a case where it is not displayed. At a rate set so that the expectation that it will be in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a small hit or a big hit) is higher than that when it is not displayed. After displaying the operation means image and displaying the operation prompt such as the “press” image, the suggestive effect design 94 is divided into a plurality of times in a predetermined order in accordance with the operation of the player (operation of the push button 120, etc.), Alternatively, an effect of simultaneously stopping at once may be performed.

  Further, in the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, after starting the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29 (B), it corresponds to each of the pending storage information as shown in FIGS. 29 (C) to (G). When the number of the second hold storage information becomes the maximum “4” without executing the changed effect, or when the second predetermined period elapses, the reach corresponding to the second hold storage information during that period is reached. You may make it perform the production | generation which displays the reach line by a pattern collectively, and forms it at once (display which increases the number of reach lines at once).

  In the specific effects shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the second pending storage information is for the effect that suggests that the suggestive effect will be a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R short-time big hit). An example of suggesting in the order corresponding to the order of occurrence is shown. However, not limited to this, the order to execute the effect suggesting that it will be a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (symbol 15R short time big hit), the second hold storage information occurs at the start of the suggested effect. The selection may be made randomly regardless of the order in which the steps are performed.

  Further, in the specific effect shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a small hit (big hit via small hit) or a big hit (symbol) is performed by simply executing an effect in which the variation display result of each reach line is derived and displayed in the suggested effect. 15R hourly short hit), but not only such a variable display result, but also a predetermined effect such as a battle effect (effect in which an ally character and an enemy character fight) and a reach line display result. It may be executed in combination with the derivation effect. For example, an image of a battle effect is displayed before deriving and displaying the display result of each reach line, and when the teammate character wins, it becomes a combination of big hit symbols, and when the teammate character loses, it becomes a combination of offset symbols. You may combine the effects. Such a combination of effects may be executed at a turning point, for example, a combination of effects may be executed twice for the first reach line and the last reach line, and only for the last reach line. May be executed. Further, the timing of executing the combination of effects may be randomly selected. In addition, the timing of executing the combination of effects may be different depending on whether the expectation of a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a short win at the time of the symbol 15R) is high and when the expectation is low. Such a combination of effects may or may not be executed. When a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) or a big hit (a symbol 15R short-time big hit) is executed with a probability of 100%. Well, it may not be executed when a small hit or a big hit is not achieved. In addition, as the timing at which the effect by such a combination is executed gets closer to the last reach line, the expectation may be increased if the hit is a small hit or a big hit. If it is possible to execute the effects by various combinations as described above, the variations of the effects are enriched, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved by the fun of the effects.

  Further, in the suggestive effects as shown in FIGS. 29 (H) to (J), when the reach symbol is a combination of deviating symbols, the symbol combination may be deleted from the screen thereafter.

  Next, the specific effect first process for executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 in the effect symbol changing process (S802) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the specific effect first process. The specific effect first process of FIG. 31 is configured and executed as a part of the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  In the specific effect first process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display executed this time is the first variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R hour short and big hit ( S881).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, as the variation pattern to be selected at the time of variation display, there is a special effect pattern as an effect pattern to be always selected at the time of the first time variable display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time / short hit. It is provided. In the game control microcomputer 560, in the variation pattern setting process (S301) of FIG. 10, it is determined whether or not it is the first variation display time of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R time / short hit is over. When it is determined that it is the time of the first variation display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R hour / short hit by the processing step and the processing step, as the variation pattern of the variation display at that time, the above-mentioned It includes a processing step of selecting a special variation pattern and a processing step of transmitting a variation pattern command designating the selected special variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In S881, whether or not the above-described special variation pattern is received is confirmed based on the data in the command storage area provided in the storage area of the RAM 103, so that the variation display result of the variation display executed this time is It is determined whether or not it is the first variable display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R short-time big hit.

  In S881, in the determination of whether or not it is the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R hour-short jackpot, when it is determined that it is not, the process is terminated, and it is determined that there is. At this time, it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start of variable display (S882). When it is determined in S882 that the variable display is started, the display of the determination start effect is started and the display of the determination effect moving image is started (S883), and the process is ended, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined in S882 that it is not the start time of the variable display, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the determination start effect by checking the elapsed time from the start of the determination start effect (S884). ..

  When it is determined in S884 that the determination start effect is finished, the display of the determination start effect is ended (S885). Then, after starting the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 29 (B), a series of effects for displaying the reach line with the “7” symbol as shown in FIG. 29 (C) is started (S886), and the process is executed. finish. In addition, when the number of the second hold storage information is not “0” at the start of the specific effect, but is several, the initial value of the second hold storage information is displayed when the first reach line is displayed. Display a reach line of numbers.

  When it is determined in S884 that it is not the end of the determination start effect, it is determined whether or not it is the time to receive the second start winning award designating command, and It is determined whether there is any (S887). When it is determined in S887 that it is the time of starting winning, the starting winning number counter as a counting means for counting the number of starting winnings to the second starting winning opening 14 in the specific effect is updated by incrementing by 1 (S888). The start winning prize number counter is a counting unit that counts the number of starting winning balls to the second starting winning opening 14 when executing the specific effect. The starting prize number counter counts the number of starting winning balls to the second starting winning opening 14 with the second reserved storage information number (eg, “0” etc.) at the start of the specific effect as an initial value. Next, in accordance with the number of winning start prizes counted by the number-of-start winning prizes updated in S888, a change effect as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G is executed (S889), and the process ends.

  When it is determined in S887 that it is the time of the start winning, it is determined whether it is the end of the prize promotion notification effect (S890). In S890, the value of the start winning number counter reaches the upper limit value (4) of the second hold storage information, or the predetermined promotion notification effect execution period (second predetermined period described above) ends. When at least one of the above is established, it is determined that it is the end time of the winning promotion notification effect. When it is determined in S890 that the winning promotion notification effect has ended, the winning promotion notification effect is ended (S891) as shown in FIG. 29 (H) and stored in the prefetching process (S501) of FIG. The current second reserved storage information (reserved storage information based on the second starting winning into the second starting winning opening 14) is acquired (S892). Then, based on the acquired second hold storage information, a process for starting suggestive effects as shown in FIGS. 29H to 29J is executed (S893), and the process is ended.

  Specifically, in S893, for the effect symbols 91, 92, and 93 that are currently changing, a symbol big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit) or small hit (small hit via 16 (15) R) based on the received display result command. It is determined whether or not it becomes a time saving big hit, a small hit via 9 (8) R hour short hit big hit, a small hit via 5 (4) R hour short hit big hit), and the prefetch effect design 94 corresponding to the second reserved memory information is acquired. Based on the second holding storage information, each holding storage information is a pattern big hit (symbol 15R time short big hit) or small hit (small hit via 16 (15) R time short big hit, small hit via 9 (8) R time short big hit, small It is determined whether or not a hit-through 5 (4) R hour / hour big hit) is achieved. Then, in S893, based on such a determination result, among the reach symbols displayed on the effect display device 9, those corresponding to the second pending storage information, which is the symbol big hit or the small hit, are the big hit symbols. The combination (777) is displayed, and for the one corresponding to the second held storage information that is out of alignment, the effect of displaying the combination of outlying symbols (combination other than 777) is sequentially executed for each reach symbol displayed. The effect pattern to be played is determined, and the determined effect is started.

  In the suggestion effect, an effect different from the effect for deriving the display result on the reach line such as a specific chance up notice may be executed together. When such an effect is also executed, in S893, The effect pattern is selected and determined, and execution is started. For example, when executing an advance notice of a chance to change the background image color to blue, green, red, gold, etc. according to the degree of expectation of a small hit or a big hit (the expectation of a big hit is blue <green <red <gold) , Confirming the contents of the second reserved storage information, and a predetermined chance up notice data table (a data table in which the selection ratio of the background image is changed depending on whether there is the second reserved storage information of the small hit or the big hit, etc. ), The process of selecting and determining the background image color may be performed.

  When it is determined in S890 that it is not the end time of the winning promotion notification effect, it is determined whether it is the end time of the suggestion effect by checking whether it is the end time of the variable display currently being executed. Yes (S894). If it is determined in S894 that it is not the time to end the suggestive effect, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S894 that the suggestion effect is finished, the suggestion effect is ended (S895), the specific effect execution flag is set (S896), and the process is ended.

  The specific effect execution flag set in S896 is a flag indicating whether or not the specific effect is being executed, and is provided for the following purpose. First, as shown in FIG. 29 (K), when the display result of the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R hour / short hit is displayed during the execution of the specific effect, In S803 of FIG. 19, it is confirmed whether or not the specific effect execution flag is set, and when it is set, the variable display result at the end of the variable display in the effect mode of the specific effect as shown in FIG. 29 (K). Is displayed. Second, in the production period of the specific effect shown in FIG. 29, after the first variable display of the second special symbol after the big hit game state of the symbol 4R hour short and big hit ends, FIG. 29 (L) to ( When the variable display based on the second pending storage information as shown in (O) is executed, it is used to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed in the specific effect second process shown in FIG. 30.

  32 is a flowchart showing the specific effect second process. The specific effect second process in FIG. 32 is configured and executed as a part of the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  In the specific effect second process, first, in order to confirm whether or not the specific effect is being executed, it is determined whether or not the specific effect executing flag is set (S901). When the specific effect executing flag is not set in S901, the process ends. On the other hand, when the constant effect executing flag is set in S901, effect data necessary for executing the variable display in the changing mode at the time of the specific effect as shown in, for example, FIGS. It is set (S902). Then, the start prize number counter is decremented by "-1" (S903). By subtracting the starting winning number counter in S903, whether or not the second reserved memory information accumulated during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R time / short hit has been consumed by the variable display It becomes possible to confirm whether or not.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the starting winning number counter has reached "0" (S904). That the starting prize number counter has become "0" means that all of the reserved memory information accumulated during the first variable display of the second special symbol after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 4R hour / short hit has been exhausted. Shows. If the start winning number counter is not "0" in S904, the process ends. On the other hand, if the start winning number counter is "0" in S904, the specific effect executing flag is reset (S905), the determination effect moving image display is ended (S905), and the process is ended. As a result, when all of the reserved storage information accumulated during the first variation display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 4R short-time big hit is exhausted, the specific effect ends.

[Explanation on Characteristic Parts 244F / 245F]
Next, the characteristic parts 244F and 245F of the present embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic portions 244F and 245F, the effect control microcomputer 100 has a short-time state after the end of the big-hit game state of various big-hit as shown in FIG. Display control to display the remaining number of variable displays (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining number of time reductions) that can be executed during the first time or the first and second special symbol variation total of 11 times, etc.) Then, a technique for performing various characteristic display controls regarding the display control will be described.

  Regarding the characteristic portion 244F, the display of the remaining number of time reductions is displayed for the second variation display (hereinafter, also referred to as the second variable display or the second special symbol variation) executed based on the second reserved memory during the time reduction state. As the display control to be executed when the first variable display (hereinafter, also referred to as the first variable display or the first special symbol variation) executed based on the first reserved memory is executed, the first display control An example and a second display control example will be described.

  As a first display control example, in the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed while the remaining time saving number for the second variable display is being displayed, the remaining time saving number is not displayed. The display control to be performed will be described.

  As an example of the second display control, when the first variable display is executed and the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of time saving is displayed for the second variable display in the time saving state. The display control that does not update the display of the remaining number of time reductions will be described below.

  For various kinds of big hits as shown in FIG. 2, the game control microcomputer 560 determines that the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display during the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state is the first number (for example, 11 times). 2nd variable display (second special symbol variation) during the time saving state and the second number of times (for example, 7 times) that is less than the first number of times The control for ending the time saving state is executed based on the satisfaction of either one of the conditions.

  Regarding the characteristic part 245F, regarding the display of the remaining number of variable displays during the time saving state, at least the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second number. When the remaining number of the second variable display until the condition is satisfied is exceeded, the remaining number of the second variable display is displayed as the remaining number of the variable display during the time saving state, and at least until the first condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display is less than the remaining number of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining number of the total number is set as the remaining number. The display control to be displayed will be described.

  The production control microcomputer 100 displays, on the production display device 9, the remaining number of variable display of special symbols that can be executed during the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state (time saving remaining number), and according to the game situation. , Display control of the remaining number of times is executed.

[Example of first display control]
FIG. 33-1 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a first display control example of the remaining number of hours saved. In FIG. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of an effect mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 15R time saving large hit (see FIG. 2). In FIG. 33-1, during the time saving state, after the variable display of the effect symbol is executed a plurality of times as shown in (A) to (H), the jackpot display result is derived and displayed as shown in (I). An example of control is shown.

  As an example, the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 15R time saving big hit, the first condition that the total number of the first special symbol fluctuation and the second special symbol fluctuation during the time saving state is 11 times, and the time saving concerned The number of times of the second special symbol variation in the state is 7 times and ends based on the satisfaction of either one of the conditions of the second condition. Hereinafter, during the time saving state, the remaining number of the total number of times the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which is the first condition of the time saving ending condition, is referred to as "total remaining number", and the second condition of the time saving termination condition The remaining number of times only the certain second special symbol variation is called "second special symbol remaining number".

  As shown in FIG. 33-1 (A), when the jackpot gaming state ends, the time saving start display image 98 in which the characters "Chance time rush" are displayed is displayed to notify that the time saving state is started. As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (A) to (H), a right-handed image 97 for instructing (promoting) right-handing (aiming to win the second starting winning opening 14) during the time saving state. Is displayed in the upper right part of the screen. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), at the start of the time saving state (total remaining number of times 11 times, second special figure remaining number of times 7), “7 remaining times” is displayed as an image showing the number of times remaining in the time saving state. An image 96 of the remaining number of time saving is displayed. The time saving remaining number image 96 displaying "remaining 7 times" shows the remaining number of only the second special symbol variation which is the second condition of the time saving ending condition.

  In the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the second special figure remaining number is set as the time saving remaining number of times. Display the number of times. Then, in the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. To do. Further, in the time saving state, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied and the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the second special figure remaining number is set as the time saving remaining number of times. Display the number of times.

  When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied and the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times may be displayed as the time saving remaining number.

  In this example, when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is equal to or more than the second special figure remaining number until the second condition is satisfied, the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number, When the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number.

  To give a specific example, the following display of the remaining number of time reductions is performed. For example, “total remaining number of times 11 times, second special figure remaining number of times 7 times” in FIG. 33-1 (B), “total remaining number of times 10 times, second special figure remaining number of times 7 times” in FIG. 33-1 (E) 3-1 (F), (G) "total remaining number 9 times, second special figure remaining number 6 times", when the total remaining number exceeds the second special figure remaining number, As the time saving remaining number, the second special figure remaining number such as “7 remaining” in FIGS. 33-1 (B) and (E) and “6 remaining” in FIGS. 33-1 (F) and (G). The remaining time saving image 96 is displayed. On the other hand, when the total remaining number is less than the second special figure remaining number, as in “total remaining number 4 times, second special figure remaining number 5 times” in FIG. The total remaining number of times such as “remaining four times” in FIG.

  At the time of the production start of the time saving state, the state where the combination of the big hit symbols (“333” in this example) that triggered the start of the time saving state is stopped and displayed with the production symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly changing small symbol 90. It is displayed as an initial display image, and thereafter, the variable display of the time saving state according to the start winning is executed. The first variable display in the time saving state (first special symbol variation) is a symbol of the last variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (C), a swinging motion is performed on the spot, and immediately as shown in FIG. 33-1 (D), the variable display result of this time is derived and displayed. On the other hand, the second variable display (second special symbol variation) in the time saving state is, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (E), (G), and (H), the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 are scrolls of the time saving pattern. The display (displayed by a downward arrow in the drawing) is changed for 4 to 5 seconds, and the variable display result is derived and displayed.

  The average fluctuation time of the first variable display in the time saving state and the average fluctuation time of the second variable display in the time saving state are different from each other (first variable display> second variable display or first variable display). The display may be variable display <second display variable, or may be the same time (same time). Further, the first variable display in the time saving state may be a scroll display in a time saving pattern as in the second variable display.

  In the effect display device 9, variable display (any variable display mode such as symbol scroll display, symbol switch display, etc.) is performed corresponding to each effect symbol 91, 92, 93, and effect symbols 91, 92. , 93 for deriving and displaying the display results corresponding to each of the left and right symbols, a middle symbol, and a right symbol are always variable small symbols 90 composed of three small symbols. The constant variation small symbol 90 is variably displayed in a manner in which the symbol always fluctuates during the variation period of the special symbol, regardless of the display mode in which the effect symbol is displayed. Even if it is difficult to recognize whether or not the effect design displays 91, 92, 93 are changing as shown in FIG. The display state of the constantly fluctuating small symbol 90 clearly shows that the variable display is being performed, and the variable display result is also clearly shown. As shown in FIG. 33-1 (I), when the variable display result of the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 becomes the big hit display result, the display result of the constantly fluctuating small pattern 90 also becomes the big hit display result, which is called "big hit!". Such a jackpot notification image 99 is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 33-1 (B), in the time saving state, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed. Occasionally, the time saving remaining number image 96 is once erased (the portion indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in the figure) over the variable display period (variation time) of the first variable display as shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D. ), As shown in FIG. 33-1 (E), the time saving remaining number image 96 is re-displayed without updating the display of the time saving remaining number at the start of execution of the next second variable display (second special symbol variation). By doing so, the display control that does not update the display of the number of remaining hours saved is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed during the time saving state, when the first variable display is executed, Since it is possible to perform display control so as not to display the number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-1C to 3E, when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, By deleting the display of the remaining number of times and re-displaying the deleted remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display, it is possible to perform display control so as not to display the remaining number of times. Since the effect indicating that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated is displayed by deleting and redisplaying the display of the remaining number of times, the remaining number of the variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is more uncomfortable for the player. Can be displayed without giving.

  Further, as described above, in the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining time saving number is The second special figure remaining number is displayed as. In the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number of times. Therefore, it is possible to accurately display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state according to the situation.

  FIG. 33-2 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute the effect display of the remaining time reduction number shown in FIG. 33-1. FIG. 33-2 (A) shows a process for controlling the display of the remaining number of time reductions at the start of fluctuation (time reduction remaining count display process A), and FIG. 33-2 (B) shows the number of remaining time reductions at the time of fluctuation stop. Processing for controlling display (production symbol variation stop processing) is shown.

  The time saving remaining number display process A of FIG. 33-2 (A) is a process performed as a part of the process in the effect symbol variation start process (S801) of FIG.

  First, at the time of the variable display this time, it is determined whether or not it is the start of the variable display (first variable display) of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state ( S911). In S911, it is determined whether or not the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state by confirming whether or not the second special figure remaining number display flag set in S928 described later is set. .. Then, in S911, it is determined whether it is the start time of the variable display of the first special symbol based on whether or not the first special symbol variation designation command of FIG. 7 is received.

  In S911, when it is not the start time of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, the process is ended. On the other hand, in S911, at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, the time saving residual number image 96 is displayed during the current variation display. As shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D, the time saving is a setting for executing an effect of temporarily erasing (a portion indicated by a dashed line in the drawing) during the variable display period of the first variable display. The remaining number display is set to be erased (S912), and the process is ended. Next, the time saving remaining number is not displayed again by the time the execution of the second variable display (second special symbol variation) is started. The time saving remaining number display erasing setting in S912 is performed in addition to the effect of once erasing the time saving remaining number image 96, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (E). It may be a setting for executing the effect to be displayed.

  In this way, when the time saving remaining number display deletion setting is made, the second special figure remaining number is the time saving remaining number image 96 in the effect symbol variation process (S802) and the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) of FIG. When displayed, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D, the effect of erasing the remaining time saving image 96 is produced. Executed. On the other hand, in S911, when it is determined that it is not the start time of the variable display of the first special symbol in the state where the second special symbol remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, S912 is not executed, so 2 When the variation display of the second special symbol in the state where the remaining number of special symbols is displayed, and when the variation display of the first different symbol in the state where the total remaining number is displayed in the time saving state, or At the time of the variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (E) to (H).

  The production symbol variation stop process of FIG. 33-2 (B) is a process configured to be able to execute the display control of the remaining number of time saving shown in FIG. 33-1 in the production symbol variation stop process of S803 of FIG. is there.

  In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (S921). If the stop symbol display flag is set, it moves to S932. On the other hand, if the stop symbol display flag is not set, for the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constant fluctuation small symbol 90, the predetermined stop symbol (departing symbol, big hit symbol, or small hit symbol) Is controlled to be stopped (S922).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the stop symbol is a symbol for a big hit (that is, whether or not the big hit display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a big hit, the stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the symbol is not the big hit, it is confirmed whether or not the symbol is the small hit (that is, whether or not the small hit display result is displayed) (S923). When the symbol is a small hit, the stop symbol display flag is set (S931), and the process proceeds to S932. On the other hand, when the symbol is not a small hit, that is, when the symbol is out of sync, it is the total number of remaining times of the total number of times of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation, which is the first condition of the time saving end condition. Is confirmed (S925).

  The "total remaining number" is provided with a counting area for counting the total remaining number in the RAM 103, and when the jackpot gaming state is finished in the counting area, the first special symbol that differs depending on the type of jackpot as shown in FIG. The total number of variations and the second special symbol variation is set as the initial value of the "total remaining number", and the first symbol variation designation command transmitted when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, and the second When the production control microcomputer 100 receives any of the second symbol variation designation commands transmitted when the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the calculation for subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. Such calculation of the “total remaining number” is executed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol variation stop process, such as the command analysis process (S704) in FIG. In S925, the "total remaining number of times" is confirmed by checking the data of the "total remaining number of times" calculated in this way.

  Next, the "second special figure remaining number", which is the remaining number of times of only the second special symbol variation, which is the second condition of the time saving end condition, is confirmed (S926). The "second special figure remaining number" is provided with a counting area for counting the second special figure remaining number in the RAM 103, and when the big hit game state ends in the counting area, the kind of big hit as shown in FIG. By the maximum value of the number of times only the second special symbol variation is the second condition of the different time saving end condition is set as the initial value of the "second special symbol remaining number", when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the second symbol variation designation command transmitted to, the calculation for subtracting and updating by "1" is performed. The calculation of the “second special figure remaining number” is executed in a process provided separately from the effect symbol variation stop process, such as the command analysis process (S704) of FIG. In S926, the "second special figure remaining number" is confirmed by checking the data of the "second special figure remaining number" calculated in this way.

  Next, as the remaining number in the time saving state, it is confirmed whether or not the “total remaining number” confirmed in S925 is greater than or equal to the “second special figure remaining number” confirmed in S926 (S927). When the "total remaining number of times" is equal to or greater than the "second special figure remaining number of times" in S927, the second special figure remaining number of times confirmed in S926 is displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 (S928), and the process proceeds to S930. Thereby, as in FIGS. 33-1 (B) and (F), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed at the second special figure remaining number which is the remaining number of the second special symbol variation. Further, in S928, the second special figure remaining number display flag indicating that the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state is set. On the other hand, when the "total remaining number of times" is less than the "second special figure remaining number of times" in S927, the total remaining number of times confirmed in S925 is displayed on the time saving remaining number image 96 (S929), and the process proceeds to S930. As a result, as shown in FIG. 33-1 (H), the time saving remaining number image 96 is displayed as “total remaining number” which is the remaining number of the total number of the first special symbol variation and the second special symbol variation. Further, in S929, the total remaining number display flag indicating that the total remaining number is displayed in the time saving state is set. In S930, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S930), and the process ends.

  Further, depending on whether it is determined that the stop symbol display flag is set in S921, it is determined to be a big hit in S923, or it is determined to be a small hit in S924, the stop symbol display flag is set in S931. Whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (any one of jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag to jackpot start 5 designation command reception flag) indicating that the jackpot start designation command has been received is set. Confirm (S932).

  If it is determined in S932 that the big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S934). Then, the preparatory setting for executing the big hit display for producing the fanfare for the big hit is made (S934). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (S804) (S935), and the process ends. As preparation settings for executing the big hit display, for example, selection of a process table for executing big hit display such as fanfare production corresponding to the big hit type, start of process timer, and effect display device 9 according to the contents of the process data. The execution of control of the production device such as is started.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S932 that the big hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the small hit start designation command reception flag (first small hit start designation command reception flag ~ It is confirmed whether any of the third small hit start designation command reception flags is set (S936).

  If it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is not set, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S936 that the small hit start designation command reception flag is set, the stop symbol display flag is reset (S937). Then, the preliminary setting for executing the small hit display for producing the fanfare for the small hit is made (S938). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the small hit display process (S808) (S939), and the process ends. As preparatory settings for executing the small hit display, for example, selection of a process table for executing the small hit display such as fanfare production for small hits, start of a process timer, and an effect display device according to the contents of process data The execution of control of the production device such as 9 is started.

  Of the effect symbol variation stop processing, the processing of S924 to S929 and the like is executed, so that in the effect symbol variation stop processing, the display control of the remaining time saving number as shown in FIG. 33-1 is executed. You can

[Second display control example]
FIG. 33-3 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a second display control example of the number of remaining hours saved. In FIG. 33-3, as in FIG. 33-1, (A) to (I) show an example of an effect mode in the time saving state after the end of the big hit game state of the symbol 15R time saving big hit (see FIG. 2). Has been done. In FIG. 33-2, during the time saving state, as shown in (A) to (H), after variable display of effect symbols is executed a plurality of times, as in (I), as in FIG. 33-1. An example of control in which the jackpot display result is derived and displayed is shown in FIG.

  33-3 is different from FIG. 33-1 in that the following display control is executed. As shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), it is standard that the remaining time saving image 96 is displayed in red (the color of the remaining time saving image 96 is represented by the letters “(red)” in the figure). It is a color (normal color). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33-3 (B), in the time saving state, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the first variable display (first special symbol variation) Is executed, the color of the remaining time saving image 96 is changed from the standard red color to the blue color during the variable display period of the first variable display as shown in FIGS. 33C and 33D. The display control microcomputer 100 executes display control that changes to a special color and does not update the display of the remaining time saving number displayed in the remaining time saving image 96.

  As shown in FIGS. 33C and 33D, the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 during the time saving state. In this case, since it is possible to perform display control without updating the display of the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving a feeling of strangeness to the player.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, By changing and displaying the color of the time saving remaining number image 96, an effect is suggested that the display of the remaining number is not updated, so that the remaining number of variable display executable during the time saving state is further increased. It can be displayed without giving a feeling of strangeness.

  Further, as described above, in the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the remaining time saving number is The second special figure remaining number is displayed as. In the time saving state, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number of times. Therefore, it is possible to accurately display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state according to the situation.

  FIG. 33-4 is a flowchart showing a process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 to execute the effect display of the remaining time reduction number shown in FIG. 33-3. FIG. 33-4 (A) shows a process for controlling the hour / hour count display at the start of fluctuation (remaining hour / hour count display process B), and FIG. 33-4 (B) relates to the hour / hour count display at the time of fluctuation stop. Processing for controlling (production symbol fluctuation stop processing) is shown.

  The time saving remaining number display processing B of FIG. 33-4 (A) is similar to the time saving remaining number display processing A of FIG. 33-2 (A), and a part of the effect symbol variation start processing (S801) of FIG. This is a process performed as a process.

  The process shown in FIG. 33-4 is different from the process shown in FIG. 33-2 in FIG. 33-4 (A), and FIG. 33-4 (B) is different from FIG. 33-2 (B). The same process is performed. 33-4 (A) is different from the time saving remaining number display processing A of FIG. 33-2 (A) in S911, in which the second special figure remaining number is displayed in the time saving state. When it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol in the state of being displayed, the variable display of the first variable display during the current variable display as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D). Over the period, the time saving remaining number image 96 is changed from the red standard color to the blue special color, and at the setting for executing the effect that the display of the time saving remaining number displayed in the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated. This is to set a certain time saving remaining number display update limit setting (S912A) and end the process.

  In this way, when the time saving remaining number display update limit setting is made, the second special figure remaining number as the time saving remaining number image 96 in the effect symbol variation process (S802) and the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) of FIG. When the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed when is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D, the time saving residual number image 96 is the standard red color. An effect is executed in which the color is changed to a special color of blue and the display of the remaining number of hour reductions displayed in the image 96 of remaining number of hour reductions is not updated.

  In FIG. 33-4 (B), similarly to FIG. 33-2 (B), the processing such as S924 to S929 is executed, so that in the effect symbol variation stop processing, the time saving as shown in FIG. 33-3. Display control of the remaining number of times can be executed.

  In the first display control example of FIG. 33-1 and the second display control example of FIG. 33-3, the big hit that triggered the start of the time saving state at the start of the performance of the time saving state (when the chance time entered). The state in which the combination of symbols (“333” in this example) is stopped and displayed with the effect symbols 91, 92, 93 and the constantly fluctuating small symbol 90 is continuously displayed as an initial display image at the start of the effect in the time saving state, After that, when the first variable display is executed, the pattern of the previous variable display result is swung on the spot, and the display result of this time is derived and displayed. However, it is not limited to this, at the time of starting the production in the time saving state (when entering the chance time), it is not a combination of the big hit symbols that triggered the start of the time saving state, but always a stray symbol such as "123". The variable display in the time saving state may be executed after displaying the combination (so-called unevenness or the like).

  In general, when the effect design is shaking on the spot in the state of the combination of the big hit symbols, the player misunderstands that the variable display result of this time is displayed as the display result of the combination of the big hit symbols. There are cases. Therefore, in order not to cause such a misunderstanding, it is only necessary to display the combination of the outlying symbols at the start of the effect in the time saving state and then execute the variable display in the time saving state. By doing so, even when the first variable display is executed for the first time in the time saving state and the display result becomes the disparity display result, the effect of changing from the disparity display result to another disparity display result is performed. Therefore, when the first variable display is executed as the first variable display at the time of starting the production in the time saving state, a combination of the big hit symbols of, for example, "333" which is shaking on the spot is suddenly changed to " It is possible not to give the player a feeling of strangeness that may be felt when changing to a combination of the outlier symbols of “334”.

  In addition, at the time of starting the production in the time saving state (when entering the chance time), the combination of the big hit symbols (“333” in this example) that triggered the start of the time saving state is the production symbols 91, 92, 93 and small fluctuations at all times. The state in which the symbol 90 is stopped and displayed is continuously displayed as an initial display image at the start of the production in the time saving state, and then, the combination of the big hit symbols performs an oscillating operation on the spot, resulting in a deviating display result. Even when the variable display is executed, the combination of the big hit symbols may be maintained and displayed as the variable display result this time. In that case, since the effect symbol is only a symbol for effect, other effects of the effect display device 9 such as the fourth symbol which can indicate whether or not the effect symbol is being variably displayed. Depending on the specific symbol displayed in the area, in the execution of the first variable display, the swinging motion effect symbol is being variably displayed, and the stopped effect symbol is out of display display result and big hit display result. It suffices if it is possible to indicate which of

[Example of control for updating the lock for updating the time remaining count]
Next, as in the second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times in the time saving state for the second variable display is being displayed during the time saving state, the remaining time is displayed. In the case of performing display control that does not update the display of the number of times, as an example of superimposing and displaying a predetermined image indicating that the display of the number of remaining times in the time saving state is not updated on the image 96 of the remaining number of time saving, explain.

  FIG. 33-5 is an enlarged view of a display area in the vicinity of the time saving remaining number image 96 showing an example of the time saving remaining number update lock display control. For example, in the second display control example as shown in FIG. 33-3, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96 as shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D). In addition, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the display of the remaining number of times in the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated. As shown in FIG. 33-5, in the example of the time saving remaining number update lock display control, when the display of the remaining number of times in the time saving remaining number image 96 is not updated, the display of the remaining number of times saving state is not updated. As a predetermined image to be suggested, a lock image 96A having transparency and surrounding the periphery of the time reduction remaining count image 96 and capable of suggesting that the time reduction remaining count image 96 is not updated is superimposed on the time reduction remaining count image 96. Display control for displaying is performed. A part of the lock image 96A includes character information such as "LOCK" indicating that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated. It should be noted that character information such as “LOCK” indicating that the display of the remaining number of times is not updated may not be included in the lock image 96A.

  Such superimposition display of the lock image 96A may be executed by setting the display in the time saving remaining number update limit display setting of S912A of FIG. 33-4 (A), for example.

  As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, the time saving remaining number By performing display control of superimposing a predetermined image indicating that the remaining number is not updated on the image 96 such as the lock image 96A, the remaining number of variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further increased. It can be displayed without giving a feeling of strangeness to the person.

  The image displayed on the remaining time saving image 96 may be a highly transparent image or an image with low transparency, and the remaining time display in the remaining time saving image 96 is visually recognized to some extent. Anything is possible if possible. Further, as the image to be superimposed and displayed on the remaining time saving image 96, it is possible to visually recognize that the remaining time saving image 96 itself is displayed, but the remaining number may be an image invisible. Further, the image to be superimposed and displayed on the remaining time saving image 96 may be either an image covering the remaining time saving image 96 or an image covering part of the remaining time saving image 96.

[First display control restriction example]
Next, in the first display control described above, that is, when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times in the time saving state for the second variable display is being displayed during the time saving state, the remaining display is performed. A first display control limitation example will be described as a control for limiting the display control that does not display the number of times.

  As described above, when the remaining number of variable displays in the time saving state is displayed during the time saving state, at least the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is It has been described that when the number of remaining times of the second variable display before the second condition is satisfied is less than the number of remaining times of the second variable display, the remaining number of the total number of times is displayed as the remaining number of times.

  Therefore, when the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is less than the remaining number of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, the first variable display When the display is executed, it is considered that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of discomfort even without performing the display control for not displaying the remaining number of times. Also, it is considered unnecessary to display the remaining number of times when the first variable display is executed in a state where the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display is displayed. Be done. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays at least the total of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied when displaying the remaining number of the variable display time saving state during the time saving state. When the remaining number of times is less than the remaining number of second variable displays until the second condition is satisfied, even if the first variable display is executed, as shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) and (D). By controlling not to erase the remaining number of times in the short time remaining number image 96, the control for limiting the first display control is executed.

  In such a first display control restriction example, the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is equal to the remaining number of second times until the second condition is satisfied. When it is less than, even if the first variable display is executed, display of the remaining number according to the gaming state is limited by limiting the effect of display control so as not to display the remaining number. As a result, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Specific notification example]
Next, a specific notification example that can be commonly executed for the display control of the remaining number of variable displays executed during the time saving state described above will be described. The specific notification is, as described above, the end condition of the time saving state based on the end condition of the time saving state based on the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display and the end condition of the time saving state based on the number of times of the second variable display. When the number of times of the first variable display is increased, the situation becomes more disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation as much as possible, the first variable display is executed during the time saving state. This is a notification executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 for specially promoting the execution of the second variable display based on the number of times of the first variable display being equal to or greater than the specific number.

  FIG. 33-6 is a display screen diagram of the effect display device 9 showing a specific notification example. In FIG. 33-6, when the specific number of times is set to, for example, 4 times during the time saving state, and the first variable display that is less than the specific number of times such as 3 times is executed, FIG. ), The specific notification is not executed. On the other hand, in the short state, when the first variable display is executed a specific number of times, such as four times, as shown in FIG. The specific notification that strongly promotes right-handing is executed by the right-handing emphasized image 97A in which the arrow image is displayed much larger than the right-pointing arrow image of the right-handing image 97 in the normal case of FIG. 33-6A. Furthermore, as the specific notification, a sound different from the sound output when the normal right-handed image 97 is displayed (for example, a sound with a high volume, a sound such as a warning sound, and a right-handed sound is disadvantageous to the player. Each of special voices such as voices indicating that the state is changed and combinations thereof are output. Further, as the specific notification, the light emitting mode of the light emitting body such as various lamps provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different from the light emitting mode of the normal right-handed image 97 (for example, light emission with a large light volume). , Special light-emission modes such as light-emission with different light-emission colors, light-emission with different blinking cycles, and combinations) are performed.

  According to such a specific notification example, the specific notification is performed based on that the number of times of the first variable display during the time saving state is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, so that the first variable display and the second variable display can be performed. In the game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of times or the second variable display, the specific notification can prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state.

[Explanation on Characteristic Parts 068SH and 069SH]
Next, an embodiment relating to the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH of the present embodiment will be described. In the embodiment relating to the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH, the notification regarding the variable winning ball device 15 will be described. In the description of the characteristic parts 068SH and 069SH, the pending storage information or the pending storage is also referred to as the pending information. The number of pieces of suspension information is also referred to as the number of suspensions. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, the variable display is also referred to as a variable display.

  The characteristic unit 068SH detects when the number of pieces of pending information stored by the second pending storage buffer is the first number (0 to 3) and when it is the second number (4) that is larger than the first number. The notification mode is different. In addition, the feature unit 069SH, when the number of pieces of holding information stored in the second holding storage buffer reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces) of holding information that can be stored in the second holding storage buffer during a predetermined period, the upper limit number. It is characterized by executing arrival notification indicating that the arrival has been reached.

  First, the technical background of the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH will be described. The specifications and game methods of recent game machines have diversified, and it is sometimes difficult for a player who has been playing with the game machine for many years to understand what specifications and game methods the game machine is playing. For example, it seems that something is happening on the gaming machine, but I do not know what is happening, where to shoot the game ball, and whether there is a loss if I shoot the game ball, etc. May feel uneasy. In particular, this tendency is remarkable in a special model called a one-and-two mixer.

  If the player does not know how to play the game, the player may suffer disadvantages or may lose advantageous rights. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the notification by the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH can prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevent the player from missing an advantageous right within a predetermined period. Further, a state in which the player feels anxiety not only hinders the interest of the player, but also fails to fully sense the original characteristics of the game machine. According to the present embodiment, since such anxiety can be eliminated, the interest of the player can be improved, and the player can easily understand the features of the game machine, thereby further enhancing the excitement of the player. You can In the conventional gaming machine, the right hit or left hit may be notified, but this alone lacks in concreteness and cannot prevent the waste hit of the game ball. Hereinafter, the characteristic parts 068SH and 069SH will be described in detail.

  34-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 used in the description of the characteristic parts 068SH and 069SH, as seen from the front. A major difference between the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 is that the variable display device is a drum-type pachinko gaming machine, and an LED indicating the number of reserved first special symbols and second special symbols. Is provided, and LEDs for instructing right-handed and left-handed are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 34-1, the variable display device 68SH009 of the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 has a plurality of revolving cylinders (hereinafter, also referred to as “reels”) to which a plurality of types of identification information (designs) are attached on the surface. However, a plurality of display areas in which a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by the rotation of the plurality of rotating drums are formed. It should be noted that the design also includes a blank design. The variable display device is provided with reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, 68SH009R (hereinafter, also referred to as "left reel", "middle reel", "right reel") arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. These reels 68SH009L, 68SH009C, 68SH009R Three consecutive areas of the areas arranged in are arranged so that they can be seen through the see-through window. In the present embodiment, the effective lines 68SHL1 (upper stage), 68SHL2 (middle stage), 68SHL3 (lower stage), 68SHL4 (downward right), 68SHL5 (upward right) shown in broken lines in FIG. When 7 are aligned, it is a big hit or a small hit.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with a first pending storage indicator 68SH001 and a second pending storage indicator 68SH002, each of which is composed of four LEDs. Each LED lights up to indicate that the variable display that has not been started is suspended. In FIG. 34-1, the white circles indicate that they are not held, and the black circles indicate that they are held. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is shown that the reserved number is 0 for the first special symbol and the reserved number is 2 for the second special symbol.

  The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with hit ball instruction arrow LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R. The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 lights the hit ball instruction arrow LED68SH005L when instructing the player to left-handed, and lights the hit ball instruction arrow LED68SH005R when instructing the player to right-handed. In FIG. 34-1, a state in which the ball hitting instruction LEDs 68SH005L and 68SH005R are turned off is indicated by a white arrow, and a state in which they are turned on is indicated by a black arrow. Therefore, in the case of FIG. 34-1, it is indicated that the right stroke is instructed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with a board lamp 68SH015. The board surface lamp 68SH015 is a lamp that is provided on the back surface of the game board 6 and irradiates the game board 6 from the back of the game board 6, and the irradiated light passes through the game board 6. The board lamp 68SH015 also illuminates the area around the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 is provided with an electric churn 68SH016. The electric Chu lamp 68SH016 is a lamp provided in the variable winning ball device 15, and is a lamp for making the variable winning ball device 15 stand out.

  The variable winning ball device 15 is a role as a variable winning ball device that changes between an open state and a closed state as described above. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100 relating to the characteristic portions 068SH and 069SH, the variable winning ball device 15 has a closed state in which the game ball cannot win or is hard to win, and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the closed state. It can be changed to and. Further, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided with a mark “M” as a mark. The mark "M" is used for notification that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (voice notification: "Aim at M").

  FIG. 34-2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31 in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The difference from the main board (game control board) 31 shown in FIG. 3 is that the liquid crystal display device 9 is out of the configuration, and the reel motor 68SH010, the reel sensor 68SH012, the reel LED 68SH014, the hitting instruction arrow LEDs 68SH005L, 68SH005R, and the first reserved memory display. The device 68SH001 and the second hold storage indicator 68SH002 are included as a new configuration.

  The reel motor 68SH010 is controlled by a motor drive signal (stepping motor phase signal) output from the effect control board 80. The reel motor 68SH010 is provided corresponding to each of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel. The left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel are rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, so that three consecutive regions are displayed on the see-through window while continuously changing for each of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel. Then, by stopping the rotation of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel, three continuous areas are derived and displayed as the display result on the see-through window 3.

  The reel sensor 68SH012 is provided inside the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel, and detects the reference position for each of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel. The reel LED 68SH014 illuminates the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel from the back surface. The reel LED 68SH014 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive areas of the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel, and each area can be independently illuminated.

  FIG. 34-3 is a diagram showing a symbol array of reels. On the reel, as symbols (identification information), red 7, blue 7, promotion notification symbol, and arrival notification symbol are drawn in a predetermined order so as to be distinguishable from each other. Among these, the red 7 and the blue 7 are sizes that can be accommodated in one area, but the promotion notification symbol and the arrival notification symbol are sizes that span three continuous areas.

  FIG. 34-4 (A) is a diagram showing a hit type table in the pachinko gaming machine 068SH100. The main difference from the type table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds and the big hit without symbols are provided in the big hit symbols. In the present embodiment, as the types of big hits, a big hit with a symbol 5R time saving, a big hit without a symbol 5R time saving, a big hit with 11 (10) R time saving, and a jackpot with 6 (5) R time saving are provided. There is. The number in the parentheses for the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened. The jackpot determination value described in FIG. 5B is used for the determination of the jackpot with the symbol 5R time saving and the jackpot without the symbol 5R time saving. Therefore, the jackpot probability with the symbol 5R time saving big hit in the present embodiment and without the symbol 5R time saving big hit is 1/199. Similarly, for the determination of the small hit, the large hit determination value described in FIG. 5B is used. Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1 / 7.35.

  The jackpot via big hit in the present embodiment includes a jackpot via 11 (10) R time reduction with a different number of rounds in a jackpot and a jackpot via 6 (5) R time reduction with a jackpot. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, there is a jackpot with a symbol 5R time shortening that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a jackpot without symbol 5R time shortening.

  The symbol 5R with time saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 5 times (5R). The symbol 5R no time saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 5 times (5R). In the case of 11 (10) R short-time big hit via small hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 10 times (10R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device is opened for 11 rounds, but the number of big winning openings is substantially 10 times, and the player is a big hit similar to the symbol 10R time junior big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel like a type. In case of 6 (5) R time saving via small hit, in the case of big hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) on condition of V winning. It's a big hit. Although the winning device for 6 rounds is opened, the number of times of opening the special winning opening is practically 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the special winning opening is the same kind of big hit type as the symbol 5R short-time big hit.

  The condition for ending the time saving state after jackpot is the same as the condition described with reference to FIG. That is, as the condition that the time saving state after the big hit with the symbol 5R is finished, the ending condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is one time, and the total number of the variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol Two conditions are set, including an end condition of 5 times. In this way, the number of times of end condition of the time saving that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 is that the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. Has been set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is once is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, may generate a big hit via a small hit. There are times.

  There is a time saving state after the big hit with the symbol 5R, and the end condition that the variable display count of the second special symbol is one and the total number of the variable display counts of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five. Is the same as the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit described in FIG. The reason is, like the one described in FIG. 2, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first start winning prize that can store up to four before the big hit game state This is because even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information is started, the variable display for one time of the second special symbol that can be easily determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player can be surely executed. .. By doing so, since the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, the jackpot which is advantageous to the player in the time saving state is likely to be determined. It can be prevented that the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed.

  Symbol 5R No time saving After a big hit, it shifts to a special normal state. The special normal state is a state in which only the effect performed by the effect control board 80 is different from the normal state. Therefore, the advantage to the player is the same as in the normal state. Further, the special normal state continues up to 30 fluctuations. In the following description, the three big hits of the symbol 5R with time saving and big hit, the small hit via 11 (10) R time with small hit, and the small hit via 6 (5) R with time saving and big hit may be referred to as the time saving and big hit.

  34-4 (B) and 34 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 54. FIG. 34-4 (B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of the symbol jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 34-4 (C) is a second special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type of a jackpot via jackpot when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

  In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (B), a numerical value that is compared with the value of Random 1 for jackpot type determination, "a big hit with a symbol 5R time saving" and "no symbol 5R time saving" The big hit judgment value corresponding to each of "big hit" is set. In the second special drawing jackpot type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (C), the numerical values that are compared with the value of random 1 for jackpot type determination are “a symbol 5R time saving big hit” and “a symbol 5R time saving none”. The big hit judgment value corresponding to each of "big hit" is set. In the case of the present embodiment, "big hit with symbol 5R time saving" and "big hit without symbol 5R time saving" are each selected at 50%.

  In the small hit via big hit type determination table of FIG. 34-4 (C), a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for big hit type determination is “Big hit via 11 (10) R time saving big hit”. The big hit judgment value corresponding to each of "6 (5) R time saving big hit with small hit" is set. However, the jackpot type determined by the jackpot via jackpot type determination table is a temporary jackpot associated with each of 11 (10) R hour / hour jackpot and 6 (5) R hour / hour jackpot. It is a type and is invalid unless a V winning is generated in the small hitting game state. In the case of the present embodiment, "big hit with 11 (10) R time reduction via small hit" and "big hit with 6 (5) R time reduction via small hit" are selected at 50%.

  FIG. 34-5 is a diagram showing a transition of a game state. FIG. 34-5 shows, as game states, a normal state, a special normal state, a big hit (symbol), a big hit (V prize), and a chance time. First, in the normal state, if a "big hit with symbol 5R time saving" or "big hit without symbol 5R time saving" is won, it shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. In the big hit (symbol) state, when the "big hit with symbol 5R time saving" ends, the time shifts to chance time A. On the other hand, in the big hit (symbol) state, when the "symbol 5R no time saving big hit" ends, the special normal state described above is entered.

  In the special normal state, if you win the "big hit with symbol 5R time saving" or "big hit without symbol 5R time saving", it shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. In the special normal state, when the variable display is completed 30 times, the normal state is entered.

  Opportunity time A, after the completion of "big hit with 5R time reduction," is the above-mentioned condition, the ending condition that the variable display count of the second special symbol is 1, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol In this state, the total number of times continues until either one of the two conditions, that is, the ending condition of 5 is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time A, for the second special symbol, a maximum of five times, including a one-time reduction and four changes in the retention information of the second special symbol, which is retained for a maximum of four during the reduction in time. Fluctuation takes place.

  In the chance time A, by the variable display based on the hold information of the first special symbol, when the "big hit with the symbol 5R time saving" or the "big hit without symbol 5R time saving" is won, the state shifts to the big hit (symbol) state again. At chance time A, the player wins the small hit and shifts to the big hit (via the small hit) state when a V winning occurs. On the other hand, in the chance time A, when the small hit is not won, or when the small hit is won but the V winning is not generated, the special normal state is entered.

  In the big hit (via small hit) state, in the big hit (symbol) state, when the "big hit with 11 (10) R time saving via big hit" or "6 (5) R time saving big hit with via small hit" ends, chance time Move to B.

  Opportunity time B is a big display with a small hit via 11 (10) R working hours and big hits, or after a small hit via 6 (5) R working hours with big hits, which is the above-mentioned condition, the variable display of the second special symbol. It is a state that continues until either one of the two conditions, that is, the ending condition that the number of times is 7 times and the ending condition that the total number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is satisfied. Therefore, in the chance time B, for the second special symbol, a total of 7 times shortening and 4 fluctuations of the holding information of the second special symbol which is held up to 4 times during the shortening, a maximum of 11 times. Fluctuation takes place.

  In the chance time B, depending on the hold information of the first special symbol, if the "big hit with the symbol 5R time reduction" or "big hit without symbol 5R time reduction" is won, it shifts to the big hit (symbol) state. In the chance time B, the small win is won, and when the V winning occurs, the state shifts to the big hit (via the small hit) state again. On the other hand, in the chance time B, when the small hit is not won or when the small hit is won but the V winning is not generated, the special normal state is entered.

  As shown in FIG. 34-5, in the present embodiment, after the advantageous state ends, the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times equal to or larger than the upper limit number (up to 5 times in the case of opportunity time A, and up to 11 times in the case of opportunity time B). If the advantageous state is controlled again by the time, the special state (chance time B) can be controlled after the advantageous state ends. With such a configuration, the special state is controlled every time the advantageous state is achieved, so that the player's feeling of excitement can be enhanced.

  34-6 and 34-7 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 in the present embodiment. Similar to FIGS. 7 and 8, FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7 show the relationship between specific command data for the effect control command, the command name, and the designated content of the command.

  In FIGS. 34-6 and 34-7, names and contents in 8C02 to 8C05, A001 to A004, A301 to A304, and C401, C402, C501, and C502 are shown in FIG. It is changed from FIG. Further, in FIG. 34-7, new commands of D101 to D104 are provided in order to specify that the special normal state is provided in the present embodiment and to specify opening and closing of the operating port.

  FIG. 34-8 shows an example of the variation pattern in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “miss”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” and “reach”. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to the case where the result is a “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative pattern is The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern.

  The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect of super reach such as super reach α or super reach X is executed.

  FIG. 34-8 (A) shows a special figure 1 variation pattern which is a variation pattern of the first special symbol. FIG. 34-8 (B) shows a special figure 2 variation pattern which is a variation pattern of the second special symbol. Of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern, after the end of the big hit with P1A1-2 big hit non-reach (loss), the design 5R time cut big hit, small hit via design 11 (10) R time cut big hit, and small hit via design 6 (5) After the jackpot with R time reduction, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first special based on the hold information of the first start winning prize that can be stored up to four before the jackpot gaming state It is a variation pattern when the design varies. As shown in FIG. 34-8 (A), the fluctuation time of P1A1-2 is 2000 ms (2 seconds).

  In addition, in the special figure 2 variation pattern, the time saving (loss) of P2A1-2 is the variation pattern when the second special symbol which is first executed changes after the end of the big hit with time reduction. As shown in FIG. 34-8 (B), the fluctuation time of P2A1-2 is 60000 ms (60 seconds). As described above, the execution time (2 seconds) of the variable display executed based on the holding information of the first starting prize after the jackpot with the shortened time is executed based on the holding information of the second starting prize after the end of the advantageous state. Is shorter than the variable display execution time (60 seconds). It should be noted that even during the time saving, after the end of the big hit with the time saving, the change pattern other than when the second special symbol executed first changes is a change pattern other than P2A1-2.

  The fluctuating time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 is also the time for making the number of reservations four in the time saving state. The period varying in P2A1-2 is the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the advantageous state, and the number of holdings stored by the second holding storage buffer is changed. It is an example of a predetermined period for making four. In one predetermined period, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state a plurality of times (three times in the present embodiment). That is, the variable winning ball device 15 is not controlled to be in the open state for the entire predetermined period.

  In this embodiment, when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variable winning ball device 15 is informed that it is in the open state (hereinafter, also referred to as “open state notification”). Further, in the present embodiment, during the predetermined period after the end of the big hit with time reduction, the promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the variable winning ball device 15 is executed. FIG. 34-9 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the open state notification and the promotion notification. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9 (A), the promotion notification is executed by temporarily stopping the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel. This promotion notification is also an open state notification because it is not notified unless the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. The arrows drawn on the right reel and the left reel indicate that the reels are changing in the arrow direction. The middle reel is an example of a first movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100. In this way, by setting the notification mode to the temporary stop of the promotion notification symbol, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, during the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the jackpot with the shortened working hours, the number of holdings stored by the second holding storage buffer is the second holding storage. When the upper limit of four pieces of hold information that can be stored in the buffer is reached, arrival notification indicating that the upper limit is reached is executed. FIG. 34-9 (B) is a diagram showing an example of arrival notification. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 34-9 (B), arrival notification is executed by temporarily stopping the arrival notification symbol on the right reel. The arrows drawn on the left reel and the middle reel indicate that the reels are changing in the arrow direction. The right reel is an example of a second movable body, and is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 100.

  As shown in FIG. 34-9 described above, the effect control microcomputer 100 stops the middle reel when the variable time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 is entered, and is stored in the second hold storage buffer. When the number of reserved pieces reaches 4, the right reel is stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to visually notify the player that the predetermined period has been reached and that the second number has been reached, by the movable body.

  In addition to the notification by the reel, the open state notification and the promotion notification include the above-described voice notification (“target M”). The voice notification is performed during a predetermined period when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state. Further, the open state notification and the promotion notification include a notification (hereinafter, also referred to as “promotion lamp notification”) for turning on the electric power lamp 68SH016 to make the variable winning ball device 15 stand out. Further, for the open state notification and the promotion notification, by turning off the panel lamp 68SH015 (hereinafter, also referred to as “panel turning off”), the light from the electric tube lamp 68SH016 is relatively brightened, so that the variable winning ball device 15 can be obtained. There is also a light-out notification that makes the item stand out.

  Whether or not to execute these various notifications changes depending on the number of reserved second special symbols. Further, depending on whether or not a specific period (30 seconds, which is half of the fluctuation time of 60 seconds of P2A1-2 in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the identification information that is first executed after the jackpot with the shortened time. Also changes. That is, the effect control microcomputer 100 has different notification modes depending on whether the number of holdings stored in the second holding storage buffer is 0 to 3, when the number of holdings is 4, and when a specific period has elapsed. .. Here, the difference in the notification mode means that, in the case of the present embodiment, the combination of the voice notification, the prompt lamp notification, and the turn-off of the panel surface that are executed is different. Further, the specific period is a period for informing the player that the remaining time during which the player can start winning in the variable winning ball device 15 is short.

  FIG. 34-10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of holdings and the notification mode. FIG. 34-10 shows the execution conditions of the voice notification, the prompt lamp notification, and the turning off of the board. In FIG. 34-10, a circle indicates that it is executed, and a cross indicates that it is not executed. The voice notification is executed regardless of whether the specific period has elapsed when the number of holdings is 0 to 3, and is not executed when the number of holdings is 4. The promotion lamp notification is executed during the entire predetermined period. The turn-off of the board surface is executed after the hold number is 0 to 3 and after the elapse of the specific period, and is not executed when the hold number is 4 or before the elapse of the specific period.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the notification mode is different when the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and when the number of holdings is 4. When the number of holdings is 0 to 3, the number of holdings has not reached 4, so at least a voice notification and a promotion lamp notification are performed to urge the player to start winning the variable winning ball device 15. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  On the other hand, when the number of holdings reaches 4, it is not possible to increase the number of holdings more than this. Therefore, by performing only the promotion lamp notification, the player is compared with the notification mode when the number of holdings is 0 to 3 This is a notification mode that is difficult for others to recognize. As a result, the notification is changed from the easy-to-recognize notification to the difficult-to-recognize notification, so that the player can more surely recognize that the number of holdings has reached 4, and when the number of holdings is 4, the game medium is ejected. It can be made unconscious. In this case, the player can stop the ejection of the game medium by, for example, releasing the ball from the hitting operation handle 5. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  Furthermore, when the number of holdings is 0 to 3 and a specific period has elapsed, all of the voice notification, the promotion lamp notification, and the turning off of the board are performed, so that the player is more strongly in the open state and the variable winning ball device 15 It is possible to appeal to the winning of the game media to the. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, the promotion notification for promoting the winning of the game medium to the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is executed, and the number of the held information stored is further increased in the predetermined period. When the upper limit number of four pieces of hold information that can be stored in the second hold storage buffer is reached, arrival notification indicating that the upper limit number is reached is executed. According to such a configuration, since the promotion notification and the arrival notification are executed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within the predetermined period. Specifically, the player can firmly enjoy the lottery with the second special symbol.

  Each notification described above will be described using a timing chart. FIG. 34-11 is a timing chart showing aspects of “voice notification”, “promotion lamp notification”, “board lamp”, “arrival effect”, “middle reel”, and “right reel” during time saving. Of these, the "arrival effect" is an effect in which arrival notification is performed by voice when the number of held items reaches four, but as will be described later, it may be notified in a specific mode different from the notification mode of arrival notification. is there. FIG. 34-11 shows a timing chart in the case where the number of reserved first special symbols after a big hit is 0 as an example. Therefore, the variation of the first special symbol does not occur before the variation of the second special symbol. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 34-11, the number of reservations is three before the specific period has elapsed, and the number of reservations is four after the specific period has elapsed.

  As shown in FIG. 34-11, when the jackpot with time saving is finished and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is started by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above. It should be noted that, in FIG. 34-11, it is simply drawn so that the fluctuation starts immediately after the big hit ends, but in reality, the display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit after the big hit ends, and the variable winning ball device 15 is started. When a prize is won, the fluctuation of the second special symbol starts due to the fluctuation pattern of P2A1-2.

  At the start of the change, the voice notification and the promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is turned on, the middle reel is rotated to the promotion notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel is rotated. There is. In that state, the number of holdings becomes three by the time the specific period expires. The section A is from the start of fluctuation to the end of the specific period. When the specific period expires, since the number of holdings has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the panel lamp 68SH015.

  After that, when the number of holdings becomes 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 finishes the voice notification, turns on the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification pattern on the right reel. The temporary stop of the arrival notification symbol is performed for 14 seconds. Therefore, 14 seconds after the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Further, when the number of holding is 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the reaching effect.

  After that, when the predetermined period has expired, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the notification of the promotion lamp and stops all reels. Next, aspects such as various notifications in the timing chart described in FIG. 34-11 will be described.

  FIG. 34-12 is a diagram showing a mode of the variable display device in the sections A and B and achievement effects, a mode of voice notification output from the speaker 27, a mode of the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015. FIG. 34-12 (A) is a diagram showing a mode of the variable display device, the voice notification, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 in the section A. As shown in FIG. 34-12 (A), in the variable display device, the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right reel and the left reel are rotating. “Aim for M!” Is output from the speaker 27 by the voice notification. Further, since the board lamp 68SH015 is turned on, the area around the variable winning ball device 15 is brightened by the board lamp 68SH015.

  FIG. 34-12 (B) is a diagram showing a mode of the variable display device, the voice notification, and the variable winning ball device 15 and the board lamp 68SH015 in the section B. As shown in FIG. 34-12 (B), in the variable display device, the promotion notification symbol of the middle reel is temporarily stopped, and the right reel and the left reel are rotating. “Aim for M!” Is output from the speaker 27 by the voice notification. Therefore, the variable display device and the voice notification are the same as those in the section A. The different point is that the panel lamp 68SH015 is turned off. By turning off the board lamp 68SH015, the area around the variable winning ball apparatus 15 becomes darker, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 becomes easier to recognize, and the player can be prompted to start winning the variable winning ball apparatus 15. it can. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the specific period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed and the number of pieces of the hold information has not reached 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the specific period before the specific period elapses. The notification is performed in a notification mode that is easier to recognize than the notification mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  34-12 (C) and (D) are diagrams showing a mode of the variable display device, the sound, the variable winning ball device 15 and the surface lamp 68SH015 when the number of held balls is four. The reason why two figures are used is that in a specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information executed first after the advantageous state. This is because it will be notified. Specifically, the output voice and the like are different depending on whether or not the first second special symbol after the jackpot with the time reduction is controlled to the time reduction or jackpot (hereinafter also referred to as "holding sequence") and not. ..

  34-12 (C) and (D) are common in that the arrival notification symbol of the right reel is temporarily stopped when the number of reserved pieces is four. Then, when there is no holding station, as shown in FIG. 34-12 (C), the speaker 27 notifies the player as “arrival” as the arrival effect. The board lamp 68SH015 lights up in the same manner as in the section A. As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification pattern. With such a configuration, the interest can be improved by setting the notification mode to the temporary stop of the identification information.

  On the other hand, when there is a holding station, the speaker 27 notifies "Congratulations" as shown in FIG. 34-12 (D). Further, the panel lamp 68SH015 lights up in a rainbow color, which is different from the case of the section A. As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled by the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the advantageous state, the effect control microcomputer 100 notifies the arrival notification. The notification is made in a specific mode (“Congratulations”) different from the notification mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within the predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to the advantageous state by the specific mode, so that the player's excitement It can enhance the feeling.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the identification information that is executed first after the advantageous state, in a specific mode different from the notification mode of the arrival notification. Notify me. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within the predetermined period by the promotion notification, and it is possible to notify that the player is controlled to the advantageous state by the specific mode, so that the player's excitement It can enhance the feeling.

  The timing chart explained in FIG. 34-11 shows the timing chart in the case where the number of holdings of the first special symbol after the big hit with time shortening is 0, but the number of holdings of the first special symbol after the big hit with time saving is 1 There may be a case where the number of second special symbols reserved is 0 or more. Therefore, there will be described a timing chart in the case where the number of holding of the first special symbol is 1 or more and the number of holding of the second special symbol is 0 after the big hit.

  34-13 is a timing chart showing aspects of "voice notification", "right hitting voice notification", "promotion lamp notification", "board lamp", "arrival effect", "middle reel", and "right reel". is there. Of these, the new "right-handed voice notification" is a notification for outputting a voice such as "right-handed!" To instruct right-handed. In the example shown in FIG. 34-13, the number of reservations is 3 before the specific period has elapsed, and the number of reservations is 4 after the specific period has elapsed. As described above, in the present embodiment, during execution of the variable display that is executed based on the suspension information stored in the first suspension storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, another promotion notification different from the promotion notification (“right hit !)). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute another promotion notification according to the short variable display time.

  As shown in FIG. 34-13, when the big hit with time saving ends, the number of second special symbols reserved is 0 and the number of first special symbols reserved is 1 or more, so the variable display of the first special symbol is Be started. Along with the start of this variable display, right-handed voice notification is started. On the other hand, during the change of the first special symbol, the voice notification (“target M”) is not performed, but the promotion lamp notification is performed and the board lamp 68SH015 is lit.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the variable display executed based on the hold information stored in the first hold storage buffer after the end of the advantageous state, the right-handed voice notification different from the prompt notification by the voice notification is performed. Run. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute another promotion notification according to the short variable display time.

  The display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit during the change of the first special symbol, and when the variable winning ball device 15 is started and won, the number of second special symbols to be reserved becomes one. When the variation of the first special symbol ends, the variation of the second special symbol that has been suspended by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 starts.

  At the start of the change, the voice notification and the promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is turned on, the middle reel is rotated to the promotion notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel is rotated. There is. In that state, the number of holdings becomes three by the time the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of holdings has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the panel lamp 68SH015.

  After that, when the number of holdings becomes 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 finishes the voice notification, turns on the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the arrival notification by temporarily stopping the arrival notification pattern on the right reel. When 14 seconds have elapsed since the arrival notification symbol was temporarily stopped, the effect control microcomputer 100 rotates the right reel. Further, when the number of holding is 4, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the reaching effect.

  After that, when the predetermined period has expired, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the notification of the promotion lamp and stops all reels.

  In this embodiment, a reel is used for the variable display device. Although the reel is rotated by the reel motor 68SH010, if the reel is rotated or stopped within a short time, a delay or advance may occur due to the moment of inertia of the load of the reel or the like, and the reel motor 68SH010 may lose synchronization. Therefore, in order to secure the reel stop operation time, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time (specific time) of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, the number of the hold information stored in the second hold storage buffer is When the number reaches four, the arrival notification is performed by voice without temporarily stopping the identification information.

  This is because the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped for 14 seconds, so that the reels can be rotated and stopped within a short time. For example, when the remaining time reaches 14.5 seconds and the number of holdings reaches 4, the rotation is started after the arrival notification symbol is temporarily stopped for 14 seconds, but the remaining time is 0. 5 seconds. Therefore, the rotation is stopped 0.5 seconds later, and the rotation and the stop are performed within a short time.

  A timing chart in the case where the number of holdings reaches four with the remaining time of the predetermined period being 15 seconds or less will be described.

  FIG. 34-14 is a timing chart showing aspects of “voice notification”, “promotion lamp notification”, “board lamp”, “arrival effect”, “middle reel”, and “right reel”. In the example shown in FIG. 34-14, the number of reservations is three before the specific period has elapsed, the remaining time of the predetermined period is 15 seconds or less, and the number of reservations is four.

  As shown in FIG. 34-14, when the jackpot with time saving is finished and the variation display of the second special symbol is started, the variation of the second special symbol is started by the variation pattern of P2A1-2 described above.

  At the start of the change, the voice notification and the promotion lamp notification are performed, the board lamp 68SH015 is turned on, the middle reel is rotated to the promotion notification symbol and is temporarily stopped at the promotion notification symbol, and the right reel is rotated. There is. In that state, the number of holdings becomes three by the time the specific period expires. When the specific period expires, since the number of holdings has not reached 4 at this point, the effect control microcomputer 100 turns off the panel lamp 68SH015.

  After that, when the number of holdings becomes four in the remaining 15 seconds or less, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the voice notification, lights the board lamp 68SH015, and rotates the middle reel. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 keeps the arrival notification symbol of the right reel rotated without temporarily stopping it, but performs the arrival effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the remaining time of the predetermined period is less than or equal to the specific time, the number of pieces of the hold information stored by the second hold storage buffer is the number of hold information that can be stored in the second hold storage buffer. When the upper limit number of four is reached, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a voice arrival notification without temporarily stopping the identification information. With such a configuration, arrival notification can be performed while ensuring the reel stop operation time.

  After that, when the predetermined period has expired, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the notification of the promotion lamp and stops all reels. With such a configuration, arrival notification can be performed while ensuring the reel stop operation time.

  Next, a process for realizing the present embodiment described above will be described using a flowchart. In the present embodiment, in the main board 31, the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 and the special symbol process process in the timer interrupt process, and in the production control board 80, the production control main process and the production control process process of FIG. Processing similar to is performed. In the following, among the processes performed in the present embodiment, such as the special symbol stop process, the processes different from the above-described processes will be described using a flowchart.

  34-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process in the present embodiment.

  In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variable display of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b. Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). When the data indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is ended, and the data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer is When it is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is ended. Further, the symbol confirmation designation command to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 is set (S132). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S139 (S133).

  When the big hit flag is set, as in the case where it is determined that the big hit with the symbol 5R time saving or the big hit without the symbol 5R time saving is set, the CPU 56 is a time saving flag which is a flag which is set when being controlled to the time saving state. When the flag is set, the time saving flag is reset (S134), and when the special state flag is set, the special state flag is reset (68SH001), and the effect control microcomputer 100 determines. Depending on the type of the big hit, the processing for transmitting either the big hit start 1 designation command or the big hit start 2 designation command (big hit start designation command) is performed (S135).

  As a result, the set jackpot start designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in S28 of FIG. Specifically, when the type of big hit is big hit without symbol 5R time saving, a big hit start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the type of big hit is a big hit with a symbol 5R, a big hit start 2 designation command is transmitted. Which type the big hit type corresponds to is determined based on the data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer).

  Further, a value corresponding to a big hit display time (a time at which, for example, the effect display device 9 is notified that a big hit has occurred) is set to the special winning opening control timer (S136). After that, in the special winning opening opening pre-processing, the special winning opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the special winning opening is opened and the round is started.

  Further, according to the type of big hit specified by the data showing the kind of big hit stored in the RAM 55, the opening pattern data for each kind of big hit stored in the ROM 54 described above is referred to, and the number of times of opening (for example, 5 times). ), Opening time (for example, 29 seconds), interval time between rounds (for example, 5 seconds), and other data indicating the opening mode are set (set) in a predetermined storage area (S137). Among such data, the release count data is set in the release count counter for counting the release count. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (S305) (S138), and the processing is ended. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special winning opening opening pre-processing.

  Further, when the big hit flag is not set in S133, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S139). When the small hit flag is set in S139, the small hitting opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54 is referred to, and the number of opening times including the setting of the small hitting open control timer used for the small hit opening control (for example, 5 times), opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), and data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time between opening are set (set) in a specific storage area (S140). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening pre-processing (S308) (S141), and the processing ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the small hit opening pretreatment.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not set in S139, it is confirmed whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state by the first time saving state or the second time saving state is set (S142). If the time saving flag is not set in S142, it means that the time saving state is not set, and therefore the routine proceeds to 68SHS005 described later. On the other hand, in S142, when the time saving flag is set, because it is a time saving state, for counting the total value of the variable display number of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol in the time saving state The total time reduction counter as a counting unit is updated by subtracting -1 (S143).

  In the big hit ending process of FIG. 14, the total time saving counter that subtracts and updates in S143 is set to 5 times by S165 when being controlled to the first time saving state after the 5R symbol time saving and the big hit, and the 5R symbol time saving with the big hit and 5R. When the second time saving state after a big hit of a type other than the symbol big hit is controlled, it is set to 11 times by S168, and by S143, the variable display which is the outlying display result is subtracted and updated every time it is executed. .. The total time saving counter is used for both the determination of whether the ending condition of the first saving time condition is satisfied and the determination of whether the ending condition of the second saving time condition is satisfied.

  Next, based on checking whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second", it is confirmed whether or not it is the end time of the variable display of the second special symbol (S145). In S145, when it is the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, not the second special symbol, the process proceeds to S148 described later. On the other hand, in S145, when it is the end of the variable display of the second special symbol, the special figure 2 time reduction counter is updated by -1 subtraction (S146). The special figure 2 hour / hour counter that is subtracted and updated in S146 is a counting means for counting the variation display number of the second special symbol when it is controlled to the first hour / hour state or the second hour / hour state after the big hit game is over. In the jackpot ending process of FIG. 14, the special figure 2 time saving counter is set to 5 times by S165 when controlled to the first time saving state, and set to 11 times by S168 when controlled to the second time saving state. To be done. The special figure 2 hour reduction counter is subtracted and updated by S146 each time the variable display that is the display result of the second special symbol is lost is executed.

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter updated in S146 is "0" (S147). In S147, when the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour count counter becomes “0”, one of the ending conditions of the first hour / hour state is satisfied, or one of the ending conditions of the second hour / hour state is satisfied. Since it is time, the process proceeds to S149, which will be described later, in order to end the currently executed first time saving state or second time saving state. On the other hand, in S147, if the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour count counter is not "0", it is to confirm whether or not another one of the end conditions of the first hour / hour state is satisfied. Then, the process proceeds to S148.

  In S148, based on the total variable display number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the time saving state, in order to confirm whether the ending condition of the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed is satisfied First, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the total time reduction counter updated and subtracted in S143 has become "0" (S148). If the count value of the total time saving counter is not "0" in S148, the process proceeds to S152, which will be described later. On the other hand, in S148, when the count value of the total time saving counter is "0", the process proceeds to S149.

  S149, S150, in each of the first time saving state and the second time saving state, when it is determined by S147 that the variable display count of the second special symbol has reached the number of end conditions, and by S148, the first special symbol and At any time, when it is determined that the total variable display number of the second special symbols has reached the number of end conditions, it is executed in order to end the first time saving state or the second time saving state being executed. ..

  In S149, the set time saving flag is reset (S149). Next, in S150, the set hour / hour counter is reset (S150). Then, in response to the completion of the time saving condition based on the number of times of variable display in the time saving state, processing for transmitting the normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S151).

  In 68SHS003, a process for transmitting a special normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is further performed (68SHS002). Then, the special normal flag indicating the special normal state is set (68SH003), the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special normal state is set to 30 (68SH004), and the process proceeds to S152.

  In S152, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal process.

  If the time saving flag is not set in S142 described above, it is not the time saving state, so it is confirmed whether or not it is the special normal state (68SH005). If the 68SH005 is not in the special normal state, the process proceeds to S152. When 68SH005 is in the special normal state, the special state counter is updated by subtracting -1 (68SH006). In 68SH007, it is confirmed whether or not the special normal counter is 0 (68SH007). When the special normal counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S152. When the special normal counter is 0, the process for transmitting the special normal state end command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (68SHS008), and the process proceeds to S152.

  In such a special symbol stop process, by S142 to S151, when the first time saving state, the second special symbol is executed once the deviation change display, the total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 5 When any one of the execution of the out-of-range variation display is satisfied, the process of ending the first time saving state is performed. Further, by S142 to S151, when in the second time saving state, the execution of the out-of-range variation display of the second special symbol 7 times and the out-of-range variation display of 11 times in total of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed. When either of the above is established, the process of ending the second time saving state is performed.

  FIG. 34-16 is a flowchart showing the big hit ending process in the present embodiment. In the big hit ending process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the value of the special winning opening control timer set before the big hit ending process is executed (68SHS101). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special winning opening control timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit ending time has elapsed (68SHS102). If not, the process ends. On the other hand, if the time has passed, in the current big hit game state, based on the data indicating the big hit type set in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55, it is confirmed whether or not the type of the big hit to be finished is the 5R timeless big hit. (68SHS103).

  When the type of the big hit to be ended is the 5R timeless big hit, the special normal state designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS104). Then, the special normal flag indicating the special normal state is set (68SHS105), the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special normal state is set to 30 (68SHS106), and the routine proceeds to 68SHS107.

  In 68SHS107, depending on the end of the big hit game state, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (68SHS107), and the process ends. Thereby, the special symbol process shifts to the special symbol normal process.

  If the type of big hit to be ended by 68SHS103 is not a big hit without symbol 5R time saving, it is confirmed whether the type of big hit to be ended is a big hit with symbol 5R time saving (S163). When the type of big hit to finish is a big hit with the symbol 5R time saving, in order to control to the first time saving state, as a termination condition of the first time saving state, "1" (2nd special symbol) in the special figure 2 time saving number counter (Variable display 1 time corresponding) data is set (S164), and total time reduction counter is set to "5" (first special symbol and second special symbol total variable display 5 times corresponding) data (S165). .. Then, a process for transmitting the first time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S167), and the process proceeds to S170.

  When the type of the big hit that ends in S163 is not a big hit with the symbol 5R time saving, it is when the type of the big hit that ends is a big hit type other than the big hit with the symbol 5R time saving and without the pattern 5R time reduction, and is controlled to the second time saving state. In order to do so, as a termination condition of the second time saving state, the data of "7" (corresponding to one variation display of the second special symbol) is set in the special figure 2 time saving number counter (S167), and the total time saving number counter is " 11 "(corresponding to a total variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol 11 times) is set (S168). Then, a process for transmitting the second time saving state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (S169), and the process proceeds to S170.

  In S170, the time saving flag is set in order to control the first time saving state or the second time saving state (S170). When controlling to the first time saving state, the first time saving flag is set. On the other hand, when controlling to the second time saving state, the second time saving flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to 68SHS107.

  Thereby, after the jackpot game state of the symbol 5R time reduction big hit is finished, it is controlled to the first time saving state, and after the jackpot type big hit game state other than the symbol 5R time shortening big hit and the symbol 5R time saving big hit is controlled to the second time saving state To be done. Then, the respective end conditions of the first time saving state and the second time saving state are individually defined by the number of fluctuation display times of only the second special symbol and the total number of times of variable display opening of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It

  In such a jackpot end process, by S164, S165, after the jackpot gaming state of the symbol 5R time saving and jackpot, execution of the one-time variation display of the second special symbol, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The setting for controlling to the first time saving state is set until either one of the execution of the deviation variation display of total 5 times of the symbol is established. Further, by S167, S168, after the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot type other than the symbol 5R hour short and big hit and the symbol 5R hour short no big hit, after execution of the second special symbol 7 times variation display, the first special symbol and the second special symbol The setting for controlling to the second time saving state is made until either one of the execution of the out-of-range variation display of two special symbols in total 11 times is established.

  Next, in the case of controlling the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state, a process of transmitting control information (actuation opening opening command) indicating that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled in the open state to the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. FIG. 34-17 is a flowchart showing the time saving first variation process for transmitting the operation opening command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The time saving first variation process in FIG. 34-17 is included in the special symbol variation process (S303 in FIG. 10).

  In the time saving first variation process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not it is the opening timing for opening the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS201). At the opening timing of the operating port, an operating port opening command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS202), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS203), and the process ends.

  When it is not the opening timing of the operation opening in the 68SHS201, the CPU 56 confirms whether it is the closing timing of the operation opening for closing the variable winning ball device 15 (68SHS204). At the closing timing of the operating port, an operating port closing command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS205), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened (68SHS206), and the process is ended. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is controlled to be in the open state over a plurality of times in one predetermined period, and in the case of controlling the open state, it is controlled to be in the open state. The control information is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  34-18 is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing (S310) in the present embodiment. In the small hit completion post-processing, the CPU 56 updates the V winning effective period timer by -1 (S441) and checks whether the V winning effective period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

  When the V winning effective period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag set in S434 or S445 is set when the V winning is already detected (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process ends. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, the V winning switch 87a is determined in order to determine whether the V winning generated by the game ball entering the V winning area 870 during the V winning valid period is detected. It is determined whether or not is on (S444). If it is not in the ON state in S444, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the ON state in S444, it means that the V winning is detected during the V winning valid period, and the V winning flag indicating that the V winning is detected is set (S445). Then, the processing for transmitting the V winning designation command is performed (S446), and the processing is ended. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the V winning has occurred.

  When the V winning effective period timer has timed out in S442, processing for transmitting a small hit end designation command is performed (S447). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the small hit has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 23, control is performed to open the opening / closing member to return the V winning area 870 (V winning opening) to the open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined to be a big hit, and the big hit flag is set (S449).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, as described above, in the small hitting game state, if the player makes a right hit in accordance with a right hit promotion notification described later, the game ball will enter the V determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%. Based on the fact that the gaming ball that has entered the V determination winning device 87 always wins the V winning area 870, the V winning flag is set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in FIG. 16). Then, the big hit flag is set in S449, and the big hit game state is controlled.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines that the data indicating the big hit type via the small hit stored in the big hit temporary type buffer in S81 is officially a big hit due to the occurrence of the V winning, and the data is changed to the big hit type buffer. Officially memorize (S450). Then, the time saving flag set at that time is once reset (S451), and the special normal flag is reset (68SH304).

  Next, the CPU 56 transmits a big hit start 3 designation command or a big hit start 4 designation command according to the big hit type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). As a result, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the big hit gaming state is starting. Next, the special winning opening control timer is set to a value corresponding to the big hit display time (S453).

  Further, referring to the big hit opening pattern data stored in the ROM 54, the number of times of opening (for example, 10 times or 5 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time (round) are referred to according to the kind of big hit. Opening pattern data indicating an opening mode such as the special winning opening closing time) is set in a predetermined storage area formed in the RAM 55 (S454). Among such data, the release count data is set in the release count counter for counting the release count in S456. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (S305) (S455), and the processing is ended. As a result, when a V winning occurs in the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state is entered.

  If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the jackpot gaming state does not occur, so the data indicating the jackpot type via the jackpot stored in the jackpot temporary type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), and the special normal state designation command is issued. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (68SHS301). Then, the special normal flag indicating that it is in the special normal state is set (68SHS302), the special normal counter indicating the remaining number of times of the special normal state is set to 30 (68SHS303), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to the special symbol. The value is updated to the value corresponding to the normal process (S300) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, when the V winning is not generated in the small hitting game state, the big hitting game state is not shifted.

  Next, the processing on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 will be described. 34-19 is a flowchart of the time saving / time variation process. The time saving variation process of FIG. 34-19 is included in the effect symbol variation process (S802 of FIG. 19). Further, the time saving time variation processing indicates the processing during variable display of the first second special symbol after the big hit with time saving.

  In the time saving / time variation process, the effect control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not the fourth reserved game has won the start prize (68SHS401). This can be confirmed by the second reserved storage number designation command. When the fourth reserved game has won the start prize, the provisionally stopped middle reel starts to rotate (68SHS402). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the remaining time is less than or equal to the specific time (68SHS403). When the remaining time is equal to or less than the specific time, the process proceeds to 68SHS405. When the remaining time is not less than the specific time, the arrival notification symbol of the right reel is temporarily stopped (68SHS404).

  The production control microcomputer 100 confirms whether or not there is a holding station (68SHS405). Whether or not there is a hold sequence can be confirmed by the command C2XX. When there is a holding sequence, "Congratulations" is output from the speaker 27, and the process is ended. When there is no holding station, "arrival" is output from the speaker 27, and the process ends.

  In the 68SHS401, when the fourth held prize has not been awarded for starting, it is confirmed whether or not a specific period has passed (68SHS408). When the specific period has elapsed, it is confirmed whether the number of holdings is less than 4 (68SHS409). When the number of reserved pieces is less than 4, the panel lamp 68SH015 is turned off (68SHS410), and the process is ended.

  In the 68SHS408, when the specific period has not elapsed, it is confirmed whether or not the operation port opening command is received (68SHS411). If the operation opening command has not been received, the processing ends. When the operation opening command is received, it is confirmed whether the number of holdings is less than 4 (68SHS412). If the number of reserved items is not less than four, the process ends. When the number of held items is less than four, voice notification is given (68SHS413), and the process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is notified by receiving the operation opening opening command. With such a configuration, the effect control microcomputer 100 can reliably perform the notification by the operation opening opening command transmitted from the CPU 56 that controls the variable winning device.

[Main effects of feature part 068SH]
(1) A gaming machine capable of playing a game (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like),
A variable winning device (variable winning ball device 15, etc.) capable of changing between a closed state in which the game medium cannot win or is hard to win and an open state in which the game medium wins more easily than the closed state.
A variable display device (variable display device 68SH009 or the like) that variably displays identification information based on the fact that a game medium has won the variable winning device, and derives and displays the display result.
Hold storage means (second hold storage buffer or the like) for storing hold information regarding variable display that has not been started yet;
An informing means (an effect control microcomputer 100 or the like) for informing that the variable winning device is in the open state when the variable winning device is in the open state;
Equipped with
The notifying unit may be arranged such that the number of pieces of holding information stored by the holding storage unit is a first number (0 to 3 or the like) and a second number (4 or more) larger than the first number. In this case, the notification mode is different (as shown in FIG. 34-10, when the number of holdings is 0 to 3, a voice notification and a promotion lamp notification, or a voice notification, a promotion lamp notification, and a panel off, while the number of holdings is A gaming machine characterized in that when there are four, only a promotion lamp is notified.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1),
The notification mode when the number is the second number is more difficult to recognize than the notification mode when the number is the first number (as shown in FIG. 34-10, when the holding number is 0 to 3, Notification and promotion lamp notification, or voice notification, promotion lamp notification, and panel turn-off. On the other hand, when the number of reservations is 4, only the promotion lamp notification is provided, so when the number of reservations is 4, the number of reservations is 0 to 3 It is harder to recognize than when it is an individual).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not to be aware of launching the game medium when the number of hold information is the second number.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
A predetermined period (30 seconds or the like) is provided for making the number of the hold information stored by the hold storage unit the second number,
A movable body control means for controlling the first movable body (middle reel or the like) and the second movable body (left reel or the like) different from the first movable body,
The movable body control means operates (stops, etc.) the first movable body at the time of shifting to the predetermined period, and when the number of suspension information stored by the suspension storage means reaches the second number. The second movable body is operated (stopping operation, etc.).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to visually notify the player that the predetermined period has been reached and that the second number has been reached, by the movable body.

(4) The gaming machine according to (3),
A variable winning device control means (CPU 56 etc.) for controlling the variable winning device is provided,
The variable winning device control means controls the variable winning device to be in an open state over a plurality of times in one predetermined period, and in the case of controlling the open state, controls to open the control. Information (operation opening command, etc.) is transmitted to the notification means (68SHS202, etc. in FIG. 34-17),
The notification means notifies that the variable winning device is in the open state by receiving the control information (YES in 68SHS411 in FIG. 34-19, YES in 68SHS412 and voice notification in 68SHS413).

  According to such a configuration, the notification means can reliably notify by the control information transmitted from the variable winning device control means for controlling the variable winning device.

(5) The gaming machine according to (3) or (4),
When a specific period (30 seconds or the like) shorter than the predetermined period elapses after the shift to the predetermined period (section A or the like in FIG. 34-12), the number of pieces of suspension information stored by the suspension storage means is When the number has not reached the second number, the notification means gives notification in a notification mode that is easier to recognize than the notification mode before the specific period has elapsed (board lamp in section B shown in FIG. 34-12B). Is turned off to make the variable winning ball device 15 noticeable in a notice mode that is easy to recognize, etc.).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

  Regarding the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called first-type gaming machine) that shifts to a big-hit gaming state based on a variable display result of special symbols and effect symbols, and a variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area. Combined with a gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a game ball has won (V winning) a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in (so-called accessory) Although the gaming machine (so-called one-and-two-type mixing machine) has been described, the gaming machine of the first type may be applied.

  Specifically, since the first-type gaming machine has a hold, by applying the characteristic part 068SH, when the number of stored hold information is the first number (0 to 3), By setting the notification mode to be different from the case of the second number (4) that is larger than the first number and applying the characteristic part 069SH, the number of stored hold information is set to the second number in the predetermined period. When the upper limit number (4 pieces) of the hold information that can be stored in the hold storage buffer is reached, the arrival notification indicating that the upper limit number is reached is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the upper limit number of the hold information is set to four, but may be another number such as eight.

  In the present embodiment, a sound such as “arrival” is output as the arrival notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrival notification may be a minute sound that is output when the game control board transmits a command and the effect control board receives the command.

  In the present embodiment, the reels are used as the first movable body and the second movable body, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first movable body and the second movable body may be an accessory. As the character of the first movable body, for example, a character that appears when a predetermined period of time has passed may be used, and as a character of the second movable body, a character that appears when the second number is reached, for example. May be used. In any case, since notification can be made by using the movable body, variations in notification can be increased, so that the player's interest can be improved.

  In this embodiment, 1 minute is used as the predetermined period, 30 seconds is used as the specific period, and 15 seconds is used as the specific time, but the present invention is not limited to this. The predetermined period, the specific period, and the specific time may be appropriately determined for each model (for example, the number of times the variable winning device is opened, time, etc.).

  In this embodiment, the variable display device is a drum type using a reel, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable display device using liquid crystal, organic EL, project mapping, or the like may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the embodiment in which the winning of the variable winning ball device 15 is urged or the arrival notification is performed has been described. However, the closed state in which the game medium cannot win or is difficult to win, and the game medium wins more than the closed state. It is not limited to the variable winning device that can be changed to the open state that is easy to perform, and may be a winning ball device that can always win, such as the first starting winning opening 13. In this case, the notification means, when the variable winning device is in the open state, instead of the notification means for notifying that the variable winning device is in the open state, also as a notification means for notifying the winning to the winning device Good. Even in this case, it is possible to notify the player of winning the prize, and the player can recognize that the player should clearly aim the winning ball device by the notification, so that the player suffers a disadvantage. This makes it possible to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period.

  In the present embodiment, the notification mode is made different when the number is the first number and when the number is the second number which is larger than the first number, but the notification mode is different (for example, stepwise) depending on the number of holdings. You may do it. That is, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 1, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 2, the notification mode when the number of reservations is 3, and the notification mode when the number of reservations is 4 may be different from each other. Even in this case, since it is possible to notify the player of winning the prize, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to do.

  In the present embodiment, the notification mode differs depending on the combination of voice, lamp, and reel, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the notification mode may be different for each of the lamp, the voice, and the reel by changing the color of the lamp, changing the sound, changing the movement of the reel, and the like. Even in this case, since it is possible to notify the player of winning the prize, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period. It becomes possible to do. Further, the remaining time in the predetermined period may be displayed digitally or by a bar.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, in order to deal with a gaming machine with diversified specifications and gaming methods, in the notification of only right-handed or left-handed, which is performed in the conventional gaming machine, the player It is possible to solve the problem that it is difficult to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period. This not only makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and to prevent the player from losing the advantageous right within a predetermined period, but also only the player who has been playing the game in the past. Not only that, even beginners can easily enjoy the game, so that it is possible to obtain an effect of promoting the increase of the game population.

[Main effects regarding the characteristic portions 244F and 245F]
(1) As shown in FIGS. 33-1C and 3D, when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, Since it is possible to perform display control so as not to display the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving a feeling of strangeness to the player.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (C) and (D), when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times for the second variable display is displayed during the time saving state, Since it is possible to perform display control without updating the display of the remaining number of times, it is possible to display the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  (3) As shown in FIGS. 33-1 (C) to (E), when the first variable display is executed when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, It is possible to perform display control so that the remaining number of times is not displayed by deleting the display of the remaining number of times and redisplaying the deleted remaining number of times after the end of the first variable display. As a result, an effect is suggested that the display of the remaining number is not updated by deleting and redisplaying the display of the remaining number. Therefore, the remaining number of the variable display that can be executed during the time saving state is further improved to the player. It can be displayed without giving a sense of discomfort.

  (4) As shown in FIGS. 33-3 (B) to (D), when the first variable display is executed while the remaining number of times of the second variable display is displayed in the time saving state, By changing and displaying the color of the time saving remaining number image 96, an effect is suggested that the display of the remaining number is not updated, so that the remaining number of variable display executable during the time saving state is further improved. It can be displayed without giving a feeling of strangeness to the person.

  (5) As shown in FIG. 33-5, when the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, when the first variable display (first special symbol variation) is executed, By performing display control for superimposing and displaying a predetermined image indicating that the remaining number is not updated on the short-term remaining number image 96 such as the lock image 96A, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the short-term state is changed. It is possible to display the image without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  (6) (B) to (G) of FIG. 33-1, S927 and S928 of FIG. 33-2 (B), (B) to (G) of FIG. 33-3, and FIG. As shown in S927, S928, etc. of (B), at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied exceeds the second special map remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, The second special figure remaining number is displayed as the number of times. Then, in the time saving state, (H) of FIG. 33-1, S927, S929 of FIG. 33-2 (B), (H) of FIG. 33-2, S927, S929 of FIG. 33-4 (B), etc. As shown, at least when the total remaining number of times until the first condition is satisfied is less than the second special figure remaining number of times until the second condition is satisfied, the total remaining number of times is displayed as the time saving remaining number. The remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be accurately displayed according to the situation.

  (7) As shown in [First display control restriction example], the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied becomes the number of times until the second condition is satisfied. When it is less than the remaining number of times of 2 times, even if the first variable display is executed, the display control is restricted so as not to display the remaining number of times. Since the remaining number of times is displayed, the remaining number of variable displays that can be executed during the time saving state can be displayed without further giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  (8) As shown in [Specific Notification Example] shown in FIG. 33-6, the specific notification is given based on the fact that the number of times of the first variable display during the time saving state is equal to or greater than the specific number of times. In the game in which the end condition of the time saving state is defined by the total number of the variable display and the second variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state by the specific notification.

  (9) By executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29 or the like, as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, the change effect is executed according to the number of pieces of pending storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the performance mode of the specific performance, the interest of the game can be improved due to the fun of the performance.

[Main Modifications of Characteristic Parts 244F / 245F]
(1) Regarding the above-described first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time reduction remaining number image 96, the time saving remaining number is not displayed. As an example of the display control to be performed, (a) display control for changing the time saving remaining number image 96 to another image such as a character image so as not to display the time saving remaining number, or (b) Other display control such as display control for not displaying the remaining time saving number may be performed by displaying the remaining time saving image 96 so as to be covered with another image such as a character image.

  (2) Regarding the above-described second display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the remaining time saving number is not updated. As an example of the display control, (a) the time saving remaining count image 96 is temporarily changed to another image such as a character image, and the time saving remaining count image 96 that has not been updated is redisplayed to update the display of the time saving remaining count. No display control, (b) display control that does not update the display of the remaining time saving time image 96 by returning to the original display by once attempting to subtract and update the remaining time saving time image 96, and (c) displaying the image of the remaining time saving image 96. A display control that does not update by suggesting not to update by changing the size (for example, changing to an extremely small image), or (d) a message indicating that the time saving remaining count is not updated in the vicinity of the image of the time saving remaining count image 96. Other display controls, such as a display control that does not update and suggest not to update, may be displayed.

  (3) In the above-described first display control example, when the first variable display is executed while the second special figure remaining number is displayed as the time saving remaining number image 96, the display of the time saving remaining number is deleted. As the control, (a) the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied is the second number until the second condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied. When the remaining number of variable displays exceeds the remaining number of time saving, the display of the remaining number of time saving is erased, and the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second condition of the end of the time saving state. When the number of remaining times of the second variable display is less than, the control for not erasing the display of the remaining number of time reductions, or (b) the first variable display until the first condition for ending the time reduction state is satisfied. When the remaining number of the total number of the second variable display exceeds the remaining number of the second variable display until the second condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, the first variable display and the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of the total number of 2 variable displays is less than the remaining number of the second variable display until the second condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, the control for deleting the display of the remaining time saving number is executed. May be.

  (4) In the first display control and the second display control, at least the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied. When the remaining number of second variable displays is exceeded, the remaining number of second variable displays is displayed as the remaining number of variable displays during the time saving state, and at least the first variable display until the first condition is satisfied. And a display control for displaying the remaining number of the total number as the remaining number when the remaining number of the total number of the second variable display is less than the remaining number of the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied. May perform the following display control. When the total number of remaining times exceeds the remaining number of second variable display until the second condition is satisfied, and when the total number of remaining times is less than the second variable display until the second condition is satisfied. Thus, the display mode of the remaining time saving image 96 may be different. In that case, different display modes include different display positions, different display colors, different display sizes, and different display shapes (fonts, etc.). Included.

  (5) As the specific notification example described above, the following control may be performed in addition to the control described above, or may be performed together with the control described above. In the time saving state, a special image such as a special character image is displayed based on that the number of times of the first variable display executed is equal to or greater than a specific number, and the player is informed that the situation is disadvantageous to the player. Control (indicate). In the time saving state, the background image is changed based on the number of times of the first variable display executed being equal to or more than the specific number, and the image of the wide display area of the display area of the effect display device 9 is larger than the predetermined range. By changing, the control is performed to notify (suggest) that the situation is disadvantageous to the player. In the time saving state, based on the number of times of the first variable display being executed being equal to or greater than a specific number, a control is performed by directly displaying a message indicating that the situation is disadvantageous to the player. do.

  (6) For the time saving remaining number image 96, an image capable of specifying whether "total remaining number" or "second special figure remaining number" is displayed is displayed as follows. Good. (A) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, the image color may be different when the “total remaining number” is displayed and when the “second special figure remaining number” is displayed. (B) Regarding the time saving remaining count image 96, the size of the image may be different when the “total remaining count” is displayed and when the “second special figure remaining count” is displayed. .. (C) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, the image shape (character font, character) is displayed when the “total remaining number” is displayed and when the “second special figure remaining number” is displayed. Thickness, character color, etc.) may be different. (D) For the time saving remaining number image 96, a message indicating which of the “total remaining number” and the “second special figure remaining number” is displayed may be directly displayed.

  (7) For the time saving remaining number image 96, at least the remaining number of the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is the second number until the second condition is satisfied. In addition to when the remaining number of variable displays is exceeded, at least the remaining number of total times of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied is until the second condition is satisfied. Even when the remaining number of times of the second variable display is less than, the second special figure remaining number of times may be displayed as the time saving remaining number of times.

  (8) Regarding the time saving remaining number image 96, the total remaining number which is the total number of the first variable display and the second variable display until the first condition is satisfied, and the second remaining number until the second condition is satisfied. Both the second special figure remaining number, which is the number of times of variable display, may be displayed in parallel.

  (9) For [Specific notification example], a predetermined specific number of times, such as four times, is set during the time saving state, and the specific notification is executed when the first variable display of the specific number of times is executed. An example was given. However, not limited to this, the specific number of times set as the execution condition of the specific notification, set the number of reserved storage (0 to 4) 9 of the first special symbol at the start of the time saving state, and the number of reserved storage After the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the specific notification may be executed when the variable display of the first special symbol is further executed.

  (10) In the above-described first display control and second display control, an example has been shown in which the display of the remaining number of time reductions can be updated at the end of variable display in the time reduction state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and control may be performed so that the display of the remaining number of time reductions can be updated at the start of variable display in the time reduction state.

[Other means configuration example 1]
The above-described embodiment includes the following means configurations.

(1) Variable display (variable display of special symbols, effect symbols, etc.) is performed, and a gaming machine (pachinko game) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (large jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 opens) Machine 1 etc.),
Hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing information regarding variable display as hold storage information,
Specific effect execution means (specific control microcomputer 100, S881 to S896 in FIG. 31, S901 to S906 in FIG. 32, etc.) capable of executing a specific effect (specific effect in FIG. 29, etc.),
Change effect execution means (micro controller for effect control) capable of executing change effects that change the effect mode of the specific effect (the first reserved hold changed effect to the fourth reserved change effect in FIGS. 29D to 29G). Computer 100, FIG. 29 (D) to (G), S889 in FIG. 31, etc.),
The specific effect execution means can execute the specific effect in response to the variable display being executed in a specific variation pattern (variation pattern of the second special symbol for the first time after the end of the gaming state of the symbol 4R hour short and big hit). (S881 in FIGS. 30 and 31),
The change effect executing means executes the change effect in accordance with the number of pieces of pending storage information when the specific effect is executed (FIGS. 29D to 29G, S889 in FIG. 31, and the like).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game due to the fun of the production.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When the variable display is executed in the specific variation pattern, a promotion effect that promotes storage of the pending storage information in the pending storage means (a prize of "store pending!" In FIGS. 29B to 29G). Further provided is a promotion effect executing means (a microcomputer 100 for effect control, S886, etc. in FIG. 31) for executing a winning promotion effect for displaying the promotion image 9B,
The change effect executing means executes the change effect in association with the increase in the number of pieces of pending storage information (FIGS. 29D to 29G, S889 in FIG. 31, and the like).

  According to such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize the relationship between the change effect and the number of pieces of pending storage information.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The change effect execution means, when executing the change effect, performs the reach line number increase effect that increases the number of lines in the reach mode formed in association with the execution of the specific effect (FIG. 29 (D)- As in (G), the reach line increase effect for increasing the number of reach lines by the look-ahead effect design 94 according to the increase in the number of second stored information items).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the relationship between the change effect and the number of pieces of pending storage information easy to visually understand.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above,
In the reach line number increase effect, the change effect executing means increases the number of lines in the same reach mode (the same "7" according to the increase in the number of held storage information as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G). Increase the number of reach lines of the pattern etc.).

  According to such a configuration, development design of production control can be facilitated.

(5) In the gaming machine of (2) or (3) above,
During the reach line increase effect, a suggestion effect indicating whether or not the advantageous state is achieved (displaying the display result of the reach line pattern corresponding to each of the held storage information in FIGS. 29H to 29J). Further, a suggestion effect execution means (effect control microcomputer 100, S893 in FIG. 31 and the like) for executing a suggestion effect or the like that suggests whether or not to be on hold is provided,
The suggestive effect is executed in a common effect period regardless of the number of lines in the reach mode (the suggestive effect period in FIG. 30, S893 to S895, etc. in FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, development design of production control can be facilitated.

(6) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
The promotion effect executing means ends the promotion effect when the number of pieces of reserved storage information reaches a predetermined value (FIGS. 29G and 29H, S890 and S891 in FIG. 31).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the effect by suppressing the excessive effect.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of pieces of pending storage information by an effect using a series of images (effects of the determination effect moving images in FIGS. 29A to 29O). 29 (A) to (O), 883 in FIG. 31, S906 in FIG. 32, and the like).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by producing a series of images.

[Other means configuration example 2]
The above-described embodiment further includes the following means configuration.

(1) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that can display a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state or the like) that is advantageous to the player,
A variable winning means that allows the game medium to enter in a predetermined state (V determination winning device 87 etc.),
A specific area (V winning area 870 or the like) provided in the variable winning means and into which a game medium can enter,
First state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S305 to S307, etc. in FIG. 10) for controlling to an advantageous state (symbol big hit, etc.) based on the variation display result,
Based on the variation display result, it is controlled to the predetermined state, and the game medium is allowed to enter the specific area in the variable winning means (V prize etc.) (small hit state etc.), and the identification is made in the predetermined state Second state control means (game control microcomputer 560, S308 to S310 in FIG. 10, S305 to S307 in FIG. 10) for controlling to the advantageous state (small hit, big hit, etc.) based on the entry of the game medium into the area. Etc.),
A predetermined effect means (effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect (an effect for displaying the V winning aura image 95 as the number-of-rounds suggestion effect in FIG. 20) based on the game medium having entered the specific area in the predetermined state. Microcomputer 100, S842 to S844 of FIG. 26),
In the predetermined state, a predetermined period (0.1 second × 10 times of opening and 1 second of closing and the like is repeated) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (10 pieces, etc.) of game media are stored in the variable winning means. Ends based on the entry,
After the game medium enters the specific area, the predetermined effect means changes the effect mode of the predetermined effect in accordance with the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means (as in FIG. 24, a small hit). The color of the V winning aura image 95 changes in the round number suggesting effect of FIG. 20 according to the winning number (1 to 10 etc.) to the V determination winning device 87 in the game state).

  According to such a configuration, after the game medium enters the specific area, the presentation mode of the predetermined effect can be changed according to the number of the game media entered in the variable winning means, so that the interest of the game is improved by the effect. be able to.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
When a game medium enters the specific area in the predetermined state, an entry notification effect means (small winning notification, etc. in FIG. 20) for informing that the game medium has entered the specific area (small) Further, the present invention further includes a process for displaying the V winning image 94 of FIG. 20 in the open process of S808 of FIG.
The predetermined effect means executes the predetermined effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (such as displaying the V winning aura image 95 when the V winning image 94 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 20). ).

  According to such a configuration, the predetermined effect is executed in association with the execution of the entry notification effect that notifies that the game medium has entered the specific area, so that the interest of the game is further improved by the effect. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means (FIG. 20 (A) to (E), V as shown in FIG. 23 (A)). (The winning aura image 95 can be changed in steps of white → blue → green → red → rainbow depending on the number of winnings to the V determination winning device 87.)

  According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the number of game media that have entered the variable winning means, and thus the effect mode of the predetermined effect and the game that has entered the variable winning means. The player can be focused on the number of media.

(4) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The advantageous state is selected from a plurality of types of advantageous states having different degrees of advantage (a plurality of types of winning types in FIG. 2),
The presentation mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage of the advantageous state that is controlled based on the game medium entering the specific area in the predetermined state (FIG. 23 (B)). As described above, the selection ratios of a plurality of types of effect patterns having different stepwise changes in color of the V winning aura image 95 are different according to the determined number of rounds for the jackpot).

  According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed stepwise according to the degree of advantage of the advantageous state that is controlled based on the game medium entering the specific region in the predetermined state. Since the player can recognize the degree of advantage of the advantageous state that is controlled based on the fact that the game medium has entered the specific area, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Hold storage means (game control microcomputer 560, RAM 55, hold storage buffer, etc.) for storing information regarding variable display as hold storage information,
Further provided is a pre-reading determination means (game control microcomputer 560, S1215, S1225, etc. in FIG. 11) for determining whether or not the variable display that has not been started is controlled to the advantageous state,
The predetermined effect means is capable of changing the effect mode of the predetermined effect to a specific mode based on the fact that the hold memory means includes the hold memory information in the advantageous state ([V winning image aura color. Modification example in which the holding continuous notification effect is produced by].

  According to such a configuration, the effect mode of the predetermined effect can be changed to the specific mode based on the fact that the reserved storage means includes the reserved storage information that is in the advantageous state. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the pending storage information that is to be included is included, so that the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

Next, other effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) By executing the specific effect shown in FIG. 29 or the like, as shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, the change effect is executed according to the number of pieces of pending storage information when the specific effect is executed. By changing the performance mode of the specific performance, the interest of the game can be improved due to the fun of the performance.

  (2) As shown in FIGS. 29 (D) to (G), a change effect is executed in association with an increase in the number of held storage information due to a winning promotion effect, thereby changing the specific effect. It is possible to allow the player to clearly recognize the relationship between the effect and the number of pieces of stored storage information.

  (3) As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, as a change effect in the specific effect, a reach line increase effect that increases the number of reach lines in accordance with an increase in the number of second hold storage information is executed. As a result, the relationship between the change effect and the number of pieces of the second hold storage information can be made visually easy to understand.

  (4) As shown in FIGS. 29D to 29G, as a change effect in the specific effect, the reach mode is increased by increasing the number of reach lines of the same “7” symbol in accordance with the increase in the number of held storage information. It is not necessary to consider the production pattern relating to the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player, such as changing the degree of expectation that is advantageous to the player according to the type of ..

  (5) As shown in FIG. 30, the suggestion production period can be executed in a common production period regardless of the number of reach lines, so that development control of production control can be facilitated.

  (6) As shown in FIGS. 29 (G) and (H), the winning promotion production is terminated when the number of pieces of the second reserved storage information reaches the upper limit number (4 pieces), thereby promoting more than necessary. By suppressing the effect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the effect.

  (7) As shown in FIGS. 29 (A) to (O), by executing a specific effect in a variable display corresponding to a plurality of pending storage information by an effect using a series of images such as a determination effect moving image, The interest of the game can be improved by the production.

  (8) By executing the round number suggesting effect as shown in FIG. 20, after the game medium enters the specific area, the V winning aura image 95 is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87. Since the effect mode of a predetermined effect such as the effect of displaying is changed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect without delaying the progress of the game.

  (9) As shown in FIG. 20, since the number-of-rounds suggestion effect by the V winning aura image 95 is executed in association with the fact that the V winning image is displayed, the effect of notifying the V winning is executed. The interest of the game can be further improved.

  (10) As shown in FIG. 20, the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting production by the V winning aura image 95 can be changed stepwise according to the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning apparatus 87. The player can be made to pay attention to the round number suggesting effect and the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87.

  (11) As shown in FIG. 23, the production mode (color) of the round number suggesting production by the V winning aura image 95 is controlled based on the V winning in the small hit gaming state. Since the number of rounds of the big hit can be recognized by the player, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect because it can be changed stepwise according to the number advantage).

  (12) As shown in [Variation example in which the pending consecutive notification effect is performed by the aura color of the V winning image], if the pending consecutive notification effect is executed, in the reserved storage information, the reserved storage information that is a symbol big hit and the small hit. Based on the fact that at least one of the pending storage information to be included is included, the performance mode of the performance for displaying the aura image can be changed to a specific mode, so the pending memory division method includes a symbol big hit or small hit Since it is possible for the player to recognize that the pending storage information, which is a big hit, is included, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game by the effect.

  (13) As shown in FIG. 21, when a V prize occurs in the small hitting game state, at least one of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the held storage information determined to be the small hit. Based on the fact that one of them is included, it is possible to execute the pending continuous notification effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  (14) As shown in FIG. 21, when it is determined that a plurality of totals of the held storage information determined to be the symbol big hit and the held storage information determined to be the small hit are stored, a holding notification effect is produced. Since it is executed, the player can recognize that there are a plurality of pieces of holding storage information that can be a big hit when the holding consecutive notification effect is executed, thereby further improving the entertainment of the game by the effect. You can

  (15) As shown in FIG. 21, blackout display is executed as a period adjustment image for preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even if the effect period of the small hitting game state changes. By executing the blackout display as such a period adjustment image, it is possible to preferably execute the pending continuous notification effect regarding the adjustment of the effect period and the like.

  (16) In the held continuous notification effect, for example, the total number of pieces of held storage information that can be a big hit in the held storage information, such as “+ 3BONUS” in FIG. 21C and “+ 4BONUS” in FIG. 21D. When the number is less than the predetermined number (3 or the like) and when the number is equal to or more than the predetermined number (4 or the like), the effect mode of the special effect to be executed is different. The crab player can be noticed.

  (17) As shown in FIG. 24, depending on the number of held storage information that can be a big hit, which is a number of rounds that is advantageous to the player, such as a symbol 15R time / short jackpot and a small hit via 16 (15) R time / short jackpot. Since the ratio of executing the continuous notification effect is different, when the held continuous notification effect is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how many times the jackpot, which is an advantageous round number, is executed.

  (18) In the holding consecutive notification effect presence / absence determination table, among the types of big hits, when the total number of holding consecutive numbers of the symbol 15R hour short and big hit and the small jackpot 16 (15) R hour short big hit is two or more, the held consecutive notification effect The data is set to run. As a result, when the holding continuous notification effect is executed, a plurality of holding storage information that can be a big hit type that is more advantageous to the player due to the large number of rounds among the big hit types is stored. By being able to recognize, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 21, based on the fact that at least one of the held storage information determined to be a symbol big hit and the held storage information determined to be a small hit is included, Since the notification effect can be executed, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect.

  (20) As shown in FIG. 21, the number of pieces of pending storage information that is determined to be a symbol big hit and the number of pending storage information that is determined to be a small hit are notified so that they can be specified in the pending continuous notification effect. Since the player can specifically recognize the number of pieces of reserved storage information that is advantageous for the player, the interest of the game can be further improved by the effect.

  (21) When a V prize is generated in the small hitting game state, the V winning notification of FIG. 21 (A) can be executed, and further, the continuous holding notification effect can be executed. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect when the winning occurs.

  (22) As shown in [Variations of production mode change of holding continuous notification production], when there are a plurality of total numbers of holding storage information that is a symbol big hit and via small jackpot When the production mode of the held consecutive notification effect is different from the case where there are only a plurality of held storage information that is a big hit, it is possible to change the effect form of the held consecutive notification effect to be executed according to the held consecutive series type. , It is possible to make the player pay attention to in which effect mode the held continuous notification effect is executed.

  (23) As shown in [Variation example of change in effect mode of hold continuous notification effect], when the ratio of selecting the effect mode to be executed is different for each of the first hold continuous type to the third hold continuous type In, it is possible to make the player pay attention to in which effect mode the held continuous notification effect is executed.

  (24) As shown in [Variation in which limited control of pending continuous notification effect is performed], after execution of the pending continuous notification effect for informing that there are a plurality of pending continuous notifications, the holding that is the target of the pending continuous notification effect is executed. Since the execution of the held continuous notification effect is prohibited until all the stored information is exhausted, new execution of the held continuous notification effect is restricted. You can clarify which one.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 33AK)
Next, the characteristic part 33AK will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic unit 33AK, when the second shortage memory number is accumulated when the time saving state ends, the second special memory number accumulated after the time saving state ends, the second special symbol. The special figure game is executed. If the small hitting game state is controlled based on the special drawing game, a V winning is generated, the game is again controlled to the big hitting game state, and the time saving state is controlled again. That is, by accumulating the second number of reserved memories in the time saving state, the probability that a so-called consecutive chan is generated increases, and when the second number of reserved memories is not accumulated in the time saving state, the amount not accumulated (for example, maximum Because it loses the opportunity to execute the special drawing game of the second special symbol (4 times) (the opportunity to win the small hit lottery to win at about 1/7), it is extremely disadvantageous to the player as compared with the case where the second number of reserved memories is accumulated. turn into. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an unfavorable state, the characteristic part 33AK executes a prize promotion notification (a notification of accumulating a hold) according to the second number of held memories at that time at the time of the final reduction in time saving. It has become.

  FIG. 35-1 is a diagram showing a hit type table in the characteristic unit 33AK. The main difference from the type table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds and the big hit without symbols are provided in the big hit symbols. In the present embodiment, as a type of big hit, big hit with pattern 5R time reduction (first big hit), big hit without pattern 5R time reduction (second big hit), small hit (first small hit) via 11 (10) R time reduction big hit, And 6 (5) R time saving via small hit (second small hit) and big hit is provided. The numerical value in the parenthesis for the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 35-1, in the small hitting via big hit in the present embodiment, there is a small hitting via 11 (10) R time saving in which the number of rounds in the big hit is different. A big hit is included. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, there is a jackpot with the symbol 5R time shortening that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol, and a jackpot without the symbol 5R time shortening.

  The symbol 5R has a time saving big hit (also called the first big hit) is a big hit in which the special winning opening is opened five times (5R). The symbol 5R no time saving jackpot (also called the second jackpot) is a jackpot in which the jackpot is opened 5 times (5R).

  In the case of 11 (10) R short-time big hit via small hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 10 times (10R) on condition of V winning. It is a big hit, and the winning device is opened for 11 rounds, but the number of big winning openings is substantially 10 times, and the player is a big hit similar to the symbol 10R time junior big hit regarding the opening of the big winning opening. I feel like a type. The small hit that triggers the 11 (10) R short-time big hit through the small hit is also called the first small hit.

  In case of 6 (5) R time saving via small hit, in the case of big hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is opened 5 times (5R) on condition of V winning. It's a big hit. Although the winning device for 6 rounds is opened, the number of times of opening the special winning opening is practically 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the special winning opening is the same kind of big hit type as the symbol 5R short-time big hit. There is a 6 (5) R time reduction via the small hit. The small hit that triggers the big hit is also called the second small hit.

  As a condition that the time saving state after a big hit ends with the symbol 5R, the condition for ending the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1, and the total number of variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 Two conditions are set, which is an ending condition of times. In this way, the number of times of end condition of the time saving that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 is that the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. Has been set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is once is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, may generate a big hit via a small hit. There are times.

  There is a time saving state after the big hit with the symbol 5R, and the end condition that the variable display count of the second special symbol is one and the total number of the variable display counts of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five. Is the same as the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit described in FIG. The reason is, like the one described in FIG. 2, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first start winning prize that can store up to four before the big hit game state This is because even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information is started, the variable display for one time of the second special symbol that can be easily determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player can be surely executed. .. By doing so, since the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, the jackpot which is advantageous to the player in the time saving state is likely to be determined. It can be prevented that the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed.

  In addition, after the big hit via the small hit, the ending condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 7 times, and the ending condition that the total number of the variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times as the end condition of the time saving state is set in consideration that the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 5R time short and big hit, may cause a big hit via a small hit. Is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be focused on the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be increased.

  In addition, the end condition that the total number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, a big hit. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol due to the reserved memory based on the first starting prize that can be stored up to four before the game state is started, the second special symbol that is easy to be decided as a jackpot advantageous to the player 7 This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of times of fluctuation can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol due to the hold storage based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, and thus the jackpot which is advantageous to the player in the time saving state is likely to be determined. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

  In addition, after the big hit without the symbol 5R, there is a shift to the normal state. In the following description, the three big hits of the symbol 5R with time saving and big hit, the small hit via 11 (10) R time with small hit, and the small hit via 6 (5) R with time saving and big hit may be referred to as the time saving and big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the present embodiment is 1/199 when the first special symbol changes. When it is determined to be a big hit for the first special symbol, it is determined as a big hit type of the first big hit or the second big hit. As shown in FIG. 35-2 (B), in the case of the present embodiment, “first big hit” and “second big hit” are each selected at 50%. The big hit symbol of the "first big hit" is set to "7", and the big hit symbol of the second big hit is set to "3".

  Similarly, the small hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. Therefore, the small hit probability in the present embodiment is 1 / 7.35 when the second special symbol changes. When it is determined to be a small hit with respect to the second special symbol, it is determined as a big hit type of the first small hit or the second small hit. As shown in FIG. 35-2 (C), in the case of the present embodiment, “first small hit” and “second small hit” are each selected at 50%. The big hit symbol of the "first small hit" is set to "1", and the big hit symbol of the second big hit is set to "5".

  It should be noted that the hit type shown in FIG. 35-1 is an example, and in the characteristic portion 33AK, the first special symbol is set not to be determined as a small hit, but the first special symbol is predetermined. It may be set so that a small hit is determined with the probability of. Further, the second special symbol is set not to be determined as a big hit, but the second special symbol may be set to be determined as a big hit with a predetermined probability. Also, the number of rounds of big hits, the number of types of hits, the end condition of the time saving state, and the like can be changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display which is the final time of the time saving state, the time saving final variation pattern (for example, the variation pattern with super reach) having a long variation display time is selected. The variation display time of the hour-shortening final variation pattern is sufficient for the second pending storage information to be accumulated to the upper limit if the right-handing is performed while the variation display based on the hour-shortening final variation pattern is being executed in the hour-shortening state. It is preferably time. By doing so, for example, the second reserved memory number can be accumulated even when the time saving state ends with only one variation of the second special symbol, and the second reserved memory information is not sufficiently accumulated in the time saving state. It is possible to reduce the chance of losing the opportunity to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, win the small hit, and miss the opportunity to become the big hit via the small hit.

  FIG. 35-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving final variation time process executed in the variation pattern setting process (S301). In the time saving final variation time process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (33AKS001).

  If the time saving flag is set (33AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation is in the time saving state (33AKS002 to 33AKS004).

  First, it is determined whether or not the variable display this time is the variable display of the second special symbol (33AKS002), and if it is the variable display of the second special symbol (33AKS002; Yes), the special figure 2 hour reduction counter It is determined whether or not the count value of is 1 (33AKS003). In addition, when it is not the variable display of the second special symbol (33AKS002; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the total hour reduction counter is "1" (33AKS004).

  Special figure 2 When the count value of the hour / hour counter is "1" (33AKS003; Yes) or when the count value of the total hour / hour counter is "1" (33AKS004; Yes), the current fluctuation display is the hour Since it is the final fluctuation in the state, the fluctuation pattern of this time is determined as the short-time final fluctuation pattern, and the setting for starting the fluctuation based on the short-time final fluctuation pattern is made (33AKS005). After that, the time saving final fluctuation time process is ended.

  When the hour / hour flag is not set (33AKS001; No), the count value of the special figure 2 hour / hour counter is not "1" (33AKS003; No), or the total hour / hour counter is not "1" ( 33AKS004; No), since it is not the final fluctuation in the time saving state, the time saving final fluctuation time process is ended. In this case, the fluctuation pattern may be determined by the process for determining the normal fluctuation pattern.

  FIG. 35-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing production setting process. The changing production setting process is executed in the production symbol variation start process (S801). In the changing production setting process, the production control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the time saving state is started from the current variation display (33AKS011). Whether or not the time saving state is started from the current variation display may be determined based on, for example, the reception result of the effect control command designating the game state.

  When the time saving state is started from the current variation display (33AKS011; Yes), the setting for executing the winning promotion notification is made in the current variation display (33AKS012). The prize promotion notification in the characteristic portion 33AK is a notification for prompting the game ball to be shot (hit) to the variable winning ball device 15 having the second start winning port 14. The prize winning promotion notification is both a right-handed promotion notification and a notification of urging the user to accumulate the second number of reserved memories. As described above, in this embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at the start of the time saving state. As a result, the player can be informed of the game method in the time saving state (right hitting), and the player can be encouraged to accumulate the second reserved memory number. Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of winning promotion notifications can be executed. In 33AKS012, an effect pattern for executing the winning promotion notification of the first aspect is selected, and based on the effect pattern, Settings are made to execute the prize promotion notification in the variable display.

  If the time saving state is not started from this variation display (33AKS011; No), after performing the process of 33AKS012, based on the received variation pattern command and display result designation command, Whether or not to execute a notice effect that gives a notice / suggestion of a big hit or reach will be determined (33AKS013). After that, the changing effect setting process ends.

  FIG. 35-5 shows a presentation mode of winning promotion notification in the present embodiment. In this embodiment, the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect are provided as the presentation aspects of the winning promotion notification. The first mode is an effect mode in which a prize promotion notification is performed by the display on the effect display device 9, and the effect display device 9 displays a notification image “Aim right!”. The second mode is an effect mode in which a prize-promotion notification is given by displaying on the effect display device 9, sound output from the speaker 27, and lighting of a lamp, and the effect display device 9 informs that "reserve hold!" The image is displayed. The third mode is a display mode on the effect display device 9 and an effect mode in which the winning promotion is informed by turning on a lamp, and the effect display device 9 displays a notification image of "Hold hold!". The strength of the prize promotion notification (strength of promotion) is in the second mode> third mode> first mode. In the present embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed in any of these effect modes depending on the necessity of winning promotion.

  FIG. 35-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving final variation effect process. The changing effect setting process is executed in the effect symbol changing process (S802). In the time saving final fluctuation effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the current fluctuation display is the time saving final fluctuation (33AKS021). In 33AKS021, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the received fluctuation pattern command specifies the time saving final fluctuation pattern. When it is not the time-saving final variation (33AKS021; No), the time-saving final variation effect process is ended.

  When it is the time-saving final fluctuation (33AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the winning promotion notification (33AKS022). In the present embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at a predetermined timing (a predetermined time after the start of the change) of the change display based on the time-saving final change pattern. In 33AKS022, it may be determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the prize promotion notification based on the elapsed time from the start of the variation.

  If it is the execution timing of the winning promotion notification (33AKS022; Yes), it is determined whether or not the number of second reserved memories is 0 (33AKS023). If the number of second reserved memories is 0 (33AKS023; Yes), the setting for executing the prize promotion notification of the second mode having the highest prize promotion degree is made (33AKS024). After that, the time saving final variation effect process is ended.

  If the second number of pending storages is not 0 (33AKS023; No), it is determined whether the number of second pending storages is 3 or more (33AKS025). If the second reserved memory number is not 3 or more (33AKS025; No), that is, if the second reserved memory number is 1 or 2, the winning promotion notification of the third mode in which the degree of winning promotion is weaker than the second mode is given. Settings for execution are made (33AKS026). After that, the time saving final variation effect process is ended.

  As described above, in the case where the second reserved memory number is 0 in the time saving final variation, the prize promotion notification having a higher degree of prize promotion than when the second reserved memory number is 1 or 2 is executed. There is. By doing so, it is possible to execute the winning promotion notification according to the second number of reserved memories. In particular, the strongest prize promotion notification is executed when the second reserved memory number is 0, so that the player can feel a sense of crisis.

  In addition, when the number of second holding memories in the time saving final change is 1 or 2, and the display result of the variable display based on the second holding storage is a small hit in the situation of executing the winning promotion notification, the winning promotion is performed. The notification may not be executed. In this case, an effect may be executed to give advance notice / indication that the display result of the variable display based on the second hold storage will be a small hit.

  If the number of the second reserved memories is 3 or more (33AKS025; Yes), the setting for executing the specific notice effect that indicates whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state (advantageous state) instead of the winning promotion notification Perform (33AKS027). After that, the time saving final variation effect process is ended.

  As described above, in the characteristic part 33AK, when the second reserved memory number is less than 3 in the time saving final variation, the player is encouraged to accumulate the second reserved memory number by executing the prize promotion notification. You can On the other hand, when the number of the second pending storage is 3 or more in the time saving final variation, by performing the specific notice production without executing the winning promotion notice, it is possible to prevent the notice from becoming troublesome and the variation display is delayed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the production by the specific notice production while preventing this.

  It should be noted that the specific notice effect may be executed at a predetermined rate instead of necessarily executing the particular notice effect when the number of the second reserved memories is 3 or more. In this case, when the specific notice effect is not executed, the winning promotion notification may be executed or the effect may not be executed. In addition, a plurality of types of special notice productions may be provided, and the execution rate of the special notice productions and the determination rate of the production manners may be changed in accordance with the display result or the like and the number of second reserved memories. By doing so, the specific notice effect is diversified, and the effect of the special notice effect can be enhanced.

  If it is not the execution timing of the prize promotion notification (33AKS022; No), it is determined whether or not the prize promotion leaving is being executed (33AKS028). In 33AKS028, for example, if the processing of 33AKS024 or 33AKS026 has been executed, it is determined that the winning promotion notification is being executed. If the winning promotion notification is not being executed (33AKS028; No), the time saving final variation effect process is ended.

  If the winning promotion notification is being executed (33AKS028; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is time to develop into super reach in the variation display based on the time-saving final variation pattern (33AKS029). If it is the timing to develop into the super reach (33AKS029; Yes), it is determined whether or not the display result of the change this time is a big hit (big hit change) (33AKS037). When it is determined that the variation this time is a jackpot variation (33AKS037; Yes), the winning promotion notification is stopped and the setting for executing the reach effect of the super reach is made (33AKS038). After that, the time saving final variation effect process is ended. If it is a big hit variation, then it will be controlled to the big hit game state, and will be controlled to the time saving state again. Even if the time is again controlled, if the second reserved memory number is not sufficiently accumulated, the winning promotion notification is executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when there is a big jackpot change, the winning promotion notification is stopped, and the reach effect for fueling the big jackpot is preferentially executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the situation.

  Note that the prize promotion notification may be continued even if there is a big hit change. In addition, when selecting the variation pattern of the time saving final variation from multiple types, if the jackpot reliability of the variation pattern of the time saving final variation (reach effect) is a specific value or more, a winning promotion notification is given. You may make it stop and perform reach production.

  If the variation this time is not the jackpot variation (33AKS037; No), the reach effect of the super reach is executed with the wipe (the small window area provided in the effect display device 9) in order to prioritize the execution of the winning promotion notification (33AKS030). ).

  If it is not the timing to develop into super reach or (33AKS029; No), after executing the processing of 33AKS030, it is determined whether or not the number of second reserved storages is 3 or more (33AKS031). When the number of second reserved memories is 3 or more (33AKS031; Yes), the winning promotion notification being executed is ended (33AKS032). At this time, if the reach effect of the super reach is being executed by wipe, the reach effect is switched to the full-screen reach effect. After that, the time saving final variation effect process is ended.

  When the number of second reserved memories remains less than 3 (33AKS031; No), it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the notice effect (33AKS033). In AKS033, it is determined whether to execute the notice effect in 33AKS013 of FIG. 35-4, and it is determined whether it is time to execute the notice effect. If it is not the execution timing of the notice effect (33AKS033; No), the time saving final variation effect process is ended.

  When it is the timing to execute the notice effect during the execution of the prize promotion notification (33AKS033; Yes), it is determined whether the notice effect is a low-anticipation notice effect (33AKS034). As the low-anticipation notice effect, any one of a plurality of types of notice effects may be set as one of the notice effects having at least the jackpot reliability degree higher than the notice effect having the highest jackpot reliability degree. For example, here, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is the notice effect with the lowest jackpot reliability.

  If it is a low-anticipation notice effect (33AKS034; Yes), even if the notice effect is executed, the notification of the winning promotion is hindered, and the player's expectation cannot be improved so much. Cancel (33AKS035). After that, the time saving final variation effect process is ended.

  If it is not a low-anticipation notice effect (33AKS034; No), setting is performed to execute the notice effect only by voice (33AKS036). That is, even in the case of a notice production that outputs a sound while displaying the notice image on the effect display device 9, the notice image is not displayed and only the sound is output. As a result, it is possible to prevent or prevent the winning promotion notification from being hindered by the notice image, and also to give a notice or suggest a big hit by voice. After that, the time saving final variation effect process is ended.

  In this embodiment, when the notice effect is executed during execution of the prize promotion notification, the notice effect is executed only by the voice, but some of the other notice effects (the lamp is turned on). Or the operation of the movable body) may be executed.

  For example, when determining whether or not to execute the notice effect in 33AKS013, it is determined whether or not it is the situation in which the winning promotion notification is executed by determining whether or not there is the second pending storage number or the time saving final variation. When it is determined that the winning promotion notification is to be executed, it is controlled so that it is not determined to execute the low-expectation notice effect, and even when the notice effect is executed, the voice notice effect can be executed. It may be determined.

  Further, even during the execution of the winning promotion notification, the notice effect may be executed in parallel. In this case, only the notice effect having an expected degree or more may be executed in parallel with the prize promotion notification.

  FIG. 35-7 is a timing chart showing the effect contents and the like in the final reduction in time saving. As shown in FIG. 35-7 (A), in the case where the second pending storage number is 0 to 2 in the time saving final fluctuation, the prize promotion notification starts at a predetermined prize promotion notification timing after the fluctuation starts. To be done. If the second number of held memories becomes 3 or more after the prize winning promotion notification is executed, the prize winning promotion notification is ended at that time. If the winning promotion notification is not executed at the time of development into super reach, the reach effect is executed as usual.

  As shown in FIG. 35-7 (B), when the second pending storage number does not become 3 or more after the prize promotion notification is executed, the reach effect executed by the wipe even after the super reach is developed. In parallel, the prize promotion notification is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 35-7 (C), when the second pending storage number is 3 or more in the time saving final variation, the specific advance notice effect is executed at the same timing as the winning promotion notification timing. For example, the specific notice production is executed until the super reach is developed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation in the period from the start of fluctuation until the super reach is developed to be prolonged.

  Next, an example of the production operation related to the characteristic part 33AK will be described. FIG. 35-8 shows an example of the effect operation when the winning promotion notification of the first aspect is executed. FIG. 35-8 (A) shows the effect display device 9 after the jackpot gaming state is finished, and the character "chance time rush" is displayed to notify that the chance time (time saving state) is entered. Has been done. In the characteristic part 33AK, the effect display device 9 is provided with a first hold display area 33AK001 indicating the first hold storage number, and in FIG. 35-8 (A), it is shown that the first hold storage number is 1. ing.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 35-8 (B), the prize-promotion notification of the first mode in which the effect display device 9 displays the prize-promotion image 33AK011 "Aim for the right!" Is executed. In the prize promotion notification of the first mode, the degree of prize promotion is higher than that of the other modes (second mode and third mode) because the game status in the time-saving state (state of accumulation of the second reserved memory number) is unknown. It's getting weaker. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a player who understands the game method from executing more than necessary prize promotion information.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 35-8 (C), the variable display based on the first pending storage is started. Further, in the characteristic part 33AK, a right hitting image 33AK012 for instructing (promoting) to make a right hit (aim to win the second start winning opening 14) is displayed in the upper right part of the screen during the time saving state. ..

  In addition, for example, before or after the winning promotion notification of the first mode, by accumulating the second reserved memory number in the time saving state, it is possible to secure an execution opportunity of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a continuous churn occurs. It may be possible to execute an explanation effect that explains to the player that it becomes difficult, and therefore, it is extremely disadvantageous if the second number of reserved memories is not accumulated in the time saving state. By doing so, it is possible for the player to understand the game nature of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 33AK, and to play the game fairly.

  FIG. 35-9 shows an example of the effect operation in the time saving final variation. FIG. 35-9 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the variable display is executed and the right-handed image 33AK012 is displayed. In the characteristic part 33AK, the effect display device 9 is provided with a second hold display area 33AK002 indicating the second hold storage number, and in FIG. 35-9 (A), it is shown that the second hold storage number is 2. ing. In the time saving final variation, when the second hold storage number is 2, at the execution timing of the winning promotion notification, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (B), “Hold hold!” Is displayed on the effect display device 9. The winning promotion image 33AK013 is displayed, and the winning promotion notification of the third mode is output in which the speaker 27 outputs the sound "Hold reservation". At this time, by blinking the second hold display area 33AK002, an effect of emphasizing that the second hold storage number is not accumulated is also executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (B), during the execution of the winning promotion notification, the variable display is executed in a small area such as the upper left of the effect display device 9.

  After that, when the number of second reserved memories does not increase, as shown in FIGS. 35-9 (C) and (D), the winning promotion information is continuously executed even when the reach is established and the reach reaches the super reach. To be done. As shown in FIG. 35-9 (D), the reach effect of the super reach is executed by the wipe (small window area) 9S.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 35-9 (A ′), when the second pending storage number is 3 in the time saving final variation, at the execution timing of the winning promotion notification, FIG. 35-9 (B ′) is displayed. As shown, the specific display effect is executed on the effect display device 9. In FIG. 35-9 (B ′), the specific notice effect is detailed by omitting the specific notice effect, but by displaying the effect image or outputting the sound, the predetermined notice effect is executed. Just do it. The specific notice effect may be a notice that gives a notice / suggestion that the jackpot will be a big hit, or may be an effect that fuels a super reach. In this way, when the second reserved memory number is sufficiently accumulated and the player is not extremely disadvantageous, the specific notice effect is executed without executing the winning promotion notification, which is suitable for the situation. The production can be executed.

(Modification of the characteristic part 33AK)
The present characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristic features may be added. Further, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Further, this feature part and other feature parts may be appropriately combined.

  The effect mode of the prize promotion notification shown in FIG. 35-5 is an example, and the strength of the prize promotion notification (strength of promotion) is the second mode (when the number of second reserved memories is 0)> the third mode (second mode). As long as the number of reserved memories is 1, 2)> the first mode (at the start of the time saving state), the effect mode may be arbitrary. As the prize promotion notification by the display on the effect display device 9, an image of the target game area or the target winning opening (second starting winning opening 14) may be displayed. In addition, as a winning promotion notification that agitates the player's sense of crisis, the time until the end of the time saving final variation may be displayed in a countdown.

  In the above embodiment, when the number of the second holding memories is 3 or more in the final reduction of time saving, the suggestion suggesting whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state (advantageous state) without executing the winning promotion notification. As a result, the specific notice production was to be executed, but the suggestion production is the production of the manager suggesting whether or not to control in the advantageous state (preliminary notice, reach production, tempo encouraging of production design, etc.) Good.

  In the present embodiment, the winning promotion notification is executed at the start of the time saving state, but the winning promotion notification at the start of the time saving state may not be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player who understands the game method from performing unnecessary prize promotion notification.

  In the present embodiment, when the reach effect is executed while the prize promotion notification is being executed, the reach effect is wiped to prioritize the prize promotion notification. The method of prioritizing and executing the winning promotion notification is not limited to this, and the winning promotion notification may be prioritized and executed over the reach effect. The area used for winning promotion notification in the effect display device 9 may be made larger than the reach effect, or the winning promotion notification may be prioritized with respect to sound output and lamp emission. It should be noted that even if the prize promotion notification is executed, the reach effect of the normal super reach may be executed. For example, when the display result is a small hit, the normal super reach may be executed even if the prize promotion notification is executed. In this case, a small hit (a big hit via a small hit) will occur even if the number of second reserved memories is small, so that the player will not be disadvantaged. By doing so, it is possible to execute the winning promotion notification according to the situation.

  In the present embodiment, the presentation mode of the winning promotion notification is made different depending on whether the second number of pending storages is 0 or 1 or 2 in the final reduction in time saving, but the number of second pending storages is 2 or less. In some cases, the winning promotion notification of the same effect mode may be executed. In addition, in the case of the second reserve memory number being 3 or more in the final time-saving change, the specific notice effect is executed without executing the winning promotion notification, but the second reserve memory number is 1 or more. When the number is an arbitrary number, the specific notice effect may be executed without executing the winning promotion notification. In the time saving final variation, the prize winning promotion notification may not be executed only when the second reserved memory number is the upper limit number at a predetermined timing after the start of the variation (for example, the execution timing of the prize winning promotion notification). That is, the threshold for changing the effect according to the second number of reserved memories in the final reduction in time saving may be arbitrary.

  The feature portion 33AK may be applied to a pachinko gaming machine including a drum type variable display device. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 9 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) the effect design as the identification information is provided, but the number of times the identification information (design) is attached to the surface A variable display device having a plurality of barrels (hereinafter also referred to as “reels”) and having a plurality of display areas in which a plurality of types of identification information are sequentially updated by rotation of a plurality of spinning drums is provided. Good. Then, instead of the variable display of the effect symbol, the variable display device may perform variable display of the symbol by rotating the spinning drum, and display whether or not the jackpot is a big hit depending on the display result.

  In this case, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may include both the effect display device 9 and the variable display device. For example, the variable display device may be provided in the central portion of the game area, and the effect display device 9 may be provided in the peripheral portion (for example, the upper portion) of the variable display device. Then, the effect display device 9 does not have to perform variable display of effect symbols, but may display various effects and games. For example, the winning promotion notification may be executed on the effect display device 9, and the specific notice effect (indication effect) may be executed on the variable display device. If the second number of reserved storages is less than 3, such as when the number of second retained storages is less than 3 in the time saving final change, the specific display effect is not executed on the variable display device, and the effect display device 9 The prize promotion notification may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the winning notification from being overlooked by paying attention to the specific notice effect on the variable display device.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a gaming machine (so-called first type gaming machine) that shifts to a big-hit gaming state based on a variable display result of special symbols and effect symbols, and a variable winning ball device (so-called) provided in the gaming area. A gaming machine combined with a gaming machine (so-called second-class gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot gaming state based on the fact that a gaming ball has won (V winning) a specific winning opening (V winning opening) Although the so-called one-and-two-kind mixing machine has been described, the characteristic portion 33AK may be applied to the second-type gaming machine.

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 33AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 33AK is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
First variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display 8a) for performing variable display,
Second variable display means (for example, second special symbol display device 8b) for performing variable display,
Holding storage means (for example, a second holding storage buffer) that stores information about variable display in the second variable display means as holding information;
After the end of the advantageous state, the special state control means (for example, the processing of S164 to S170 that can control the special state (for example, the time saving state) in which it is easier to store the hold information than the normal state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times is CPU56) which executes,
Production control means capable of executing a promotion notification (for example, a prize promotion notification) for prompting to store the suspension information and a suggestion effect (for example, a specific notice effect) that indicates whether or not the advantageous state is controlled. For example, an effect control CPU 101) that executes a time-saving final variation effect process,
In the special state, when the holding information is stored up to the upper limit number, the ratio controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when not storing up to the upper limit number (for example, in the variable display of the second special symbol, Small hits occur at a rate of about 1/7),
The effect control means,
When the special state final variable display, which is the variable display of the predetermined number of times, is executed with the first number (for example, 0 to 2) in which the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage unit is less than the upper limit number, The promotion notification can be executed,
When the special state final variable display is executed with a second number (for example, 3 or more) in which the number of the suspension information stored in the suspension storage unit is larger than the first number, the promotion notification is not executed. Then, the suggestion effect is executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate notification according to the situation.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect control means, when controlled to the special state, can execute the promotion notification (for example, the winning promotion notification of the first mode) in a mode different from the promotion notification in the special state final variable display. You can
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the promotion notification, and to pay attention to the promotion notification in the special state final variable display.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The effect control means is capable of performing a reach effect after a specific timing of the special state final variable display, and when the number of the hold information is the first number even after the specific timing, the reach effect is generated. Alternatively, the promotion notification may be executed with priority (for example, the reach effect may be executed with the wipe 9S).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Including 0 as the first number,
The effect control means changes the mode of the promotion notification (for example, executes the processing of 33AKS023 to 33AKS026) depending on whether the number of the hold information is 0 or the other first number. May be.
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute the promotion notification.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
When it is decided to execute the suggestive effect with a specific expectation during the execution of the promotion notification, the effect control means executes at least a part of the suggestive effect (for example, executes the process of 33AKS036). Yes).
With such a configuration, it is possible to let the player recognize that the suggestion effect of the specific expectation is being executed.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The effect control means executes the suggestion effect in a first effect device (for example, a drum-type variable display device), and the promotion notification is a second effect device (for example, effect display device 9) different from the first effect device. May be executed in.
With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the second effect device for which the promotion notification is being executed.

(Explanation regarding the characteristic part 73AK)
Subsequently, the characteristic portion 73AK will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic unit 73AK, when the second holding information, which is the number of the second holding information (second holding storage, second holding storage information), is accumulated when the time saving state ends, , The number of second reserved memories accumulated even after the end of the time saving state, the special figure game (variable display) of the second special symbol is executed. If the small hitting game state is controlled based on the special drawing game, a V winning is generated, the game is again controlled to the big hitting game state, and the time saving state is controlled again. That is, by accumulating the second number of reserved memories in the time saving state, the probability that a so-called consecutive chan is generated increases, and when the second number of reserved memories is not accumulated in the time saving state, the amount not accumulated (for example, maximum Because it loses the opportunity to execute the special drawing game of the second special symbol (4 times) (the chance to win the small hit lottery to win at about 1/7 as described below), it is much more playable than when the second reserved memory number is accumulated. Will be disadvantageous to the person. Therefore, the value of one of the second reserved storage numbers is high.

  During the last fluctuation in the time saving state (for example, immediately before the end of fluctuation), the game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 15 and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed, and when the display result of the normal symbol is a win, the time saving is performed. There is a possibility that the variable winning ball device 15 is opened during the change of the second special symbol after the end of the state. Then, there is a possibility that the game balls are won in the variable winning ball device 15 (the second starting winning port 14) in the open state, and the number of second reserved memories is increased. In such a case, after the end of the time saving state, the special figure game of the second special symbol will be executed beyond the upper limit number of the second reserved storage number of 4 times. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the characteristic part 73AK, the value of one of the second reserved storage numbers is high. Therefore, after the end of the time saving state, if the special drawing game of the second special symbol is executed exceeding the upper limit of the number of second reserved memories, the probability of small hit occurrence (probability of consecutive chan) increases, so the player is more than expected. It becomes advantageous to, and it becomes impossible to guarantee the fairness of the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the characteristic unit 73AK, the time saving state (high base control) is ended when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit number during the last fluctuation in the time saving state. There is. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from opening and the second number of reserved memories increasing after the time saving state ends, and after the time saving state ends, the upper limit of the second number of reserved memories is exceeded. Thus, it is possible to prevent the special figure game of the second special symbol from being executed. And the fairness of the game can be secured.

  FIG. 36-1 is a diagram showing a hit type table in the characteristic unit 73AK. The main difference from the type table shown in FIG. 2 is that the number of rounds, a big hit without a time saving in the big hit of the symbol is provided, and a small hit occurs based on the variable display of the first special symbol. In this embodiment, as a big hit type, there is a big hit with a symbol 5R time reduction (first big hit), a big hit without pattern 5R time reduction (second big hit), a small hit (first small hit) via 11 (10) R time reduction, and Small hit (2nd small hit) via 6 (5) R time saving Large hit is provided. The numerical value in the parenthesis for the big hit via the small hit indicates the number of times the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened. Further, as a small hit type, a first small hit, a second small hit, and a third small hit are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. 36-2 (A). Therefore, the jackpot probability in this embodiment is 1/199 when the first special symbol and the second special symbol change. When it is determined to be a big hit, the big hit type of the first big hit or the second big hit is determined. As shown in FIG. 36-2 (B), in the case of this embodiment, “first big hit” and “second big hit” are selected at 50%. The big hit symbol of the "first big hit" is set to "7", and the big hit symbol of the second big hit is set to "3".

  Similarly, the small hit determination is performed with the probability shown in FIG. Therefore, the small hit probability in this embodiment is 1/30 when the first special symbol changes, and 1 / 7.35 when the second special symbol changes. When it is determined to be a small hit for the second special symbol, it is determined as a small hit type of the first small hit or the second small hit. As shown in FIG. 36-2 (C), in the case of the present embodiment, "first small hit" and "second small hit" are selected at 50% when the second special symbol changes. The small hit pattern of the "first small hit" is set to "1", and the small hit pattern of the second big hit is set to "5". When it is determined to be a small hit for the first special symbol, the small hit type of the third small hit is determined. As shown in FIG. 36-2 (D), in the case of the present embodiment, "3rd small hit" is selected at 100% when the first special symbol changes. The “3rd small hit” small hit symbol is set to “9”.

  As shown in FIG. 36-1, in the small hitting via big hit in this embodiment, there is a small hitting via 11 (10) R time saving with a different number of rounds in the big hit. A big hit is included. On the other hand, the symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, there is a jackpot with the symbol 5R time shortening that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a jackpot without the symbol 5R time shortening.

  The jackpot with the symbol 5R time saving (also referred to as the first jackpot) and the jackpot without the symbol 5R time saving (also referred to as the second jackpot) are jackpots in which the special winning opening is opened five times (5R: 29 seconds in each round).

  In the case of 11 (10) R hour / hour jackpot via small hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is 10 times (10R: each round) on condition of V winning. It is a jackpot that is opened for 29 seconds, and the winning device for 11 rounds is opened, but the number of times the big winning opening is opened is 10 times, and the player shortens the symbol 10R when opening the big winning opening. I feel that it is the same type of jackpot as the jackpot. The small hit that triggers the 11 (10) R short-time big hit through the small hit is also called the first small hit.

  There is 6 (5) R time reduction via small hit. In the big hit, after the V determination winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times), the big winning opening is 5 times (5R: 29 in each round) on condition of V winning. Seconds) It is a jackpot that is released. Although the winning device for 6 rounds is opened, the number of times of opening the special winning opening is practically 5 times, and the player feels that the opening of the special winning opening is the same kind of big hit type as the symbol 5R short-time big hit. There is a 6 (5) R time reduction via the small hit. The small hit that triggers the big hit is also called the second small hit. The first small hit and the second small hit occur based on the variable display of the second special symbol.

  The third small hit that is generated based on the variable display of the first special symbol, the V determination winning device 87 is opened (0.1 seconds × 10 times) like the first small hit and the second small hit. , V is a small hit with no win.

  FIG. 36-3 is a timing chart showing an opening mode of the V winning area in the small hit. When it becomes the first small hit or the second small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 36-3 (A), the V determination winning device 87 (0.1 seconds × When it is opened 10 times, the V winning area 870 is also opened until one gaming ball wins the V winning area 870. As a result, in the small hit game state based on the first small hit and the second small hit, it is possible to win V. On the other hand, when the third small hit is made based on the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 36-3 (B), the V determination winning device 87 (0.1 seconds × When it is opened 10 times, the V winning area 870 is closed, and after the end of opening the V determination winning apparatus 87, the V winning area 870 is opened after t hours. Here, t is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the V prize area 870 from the V determination prize device 87 (actuating port), so V is in the small hit game state based on the third small hit. It is not possible to win a prize.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there is a case where the small hit is won based on the variable display of the first special symbol, but there is little substantial merit to the player. .. In this way, by providing the small hit type with little substantial merit to the player, it is possible to prevent the small hit from being excessively advantageous to the player.

  As a condition that the time saving state after a big hit ends with the symbol 5R, the condition for ending the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1, and the total number of variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 5 Two conditions are set, which is an ending condition of times. In this way, the number of times of end condition of the time saving that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 1 is that the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. Has been set. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is once is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, at a rate of about 1/7, may generate a big hit via a small hit. There are times.

  There is a time saving state after the big hit with the symbol 5R, and the end condition that the variable display count of the second special symbol is one and the total number of the variable display counts of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is five. Is the same as the time saving state after the symbol 4R time saving big hit described in FIG. The reason is, like the one described in FIG. 2, immediately after the start of the time saving state, before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the first start winning prize that can store up to four before the big hit game state This is because even if the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information is started, the variable display for one time of the second special symbol that can be easily determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player can be surely executed. .. By doing so, since the variable display of the first special symbol based on the hold information of the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, the jackpot which is advantageous to the player in the time saving state is likely to be determined. It can be prevented that the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed.

  In addition, after the big hit via the small hit, the ending condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 7 times, and the ending condition that the total number of the variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times Two end states are set. The number of times of 7 times as the end condition of the time saving state is set in consideration that the game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 enter the V winning region 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special symbol, a small hit occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition that the variable display number of the second special symbol is 7 times, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, compared to the symbol 5R time short and big hit, may cause a big hit via a small hit. Is significantly higher. As a result, the player can be focused on the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit, and the player's expectation about the occurrence of the big hit via the small hit can be increased.

  In addition, the end condition that the total number of times of variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 11 times is immediately after the start of the time saving state and before the variable display start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, a big hit. Even if the variable display of the first special symbol due to the reserved memory based on the first starting prize that can be stored up to four before the game state is started, the second special symbol that is easy to be decided as a jackpot advantageous to the player 7 This is to ensure that the variable display of the number of times of fluctuation can be executed. By doing so, the variable display of the first special symbol due to the hold storage based on the first start winning is started immediately after the start of the time saving state, and thus the jackpot which is advantageous to the player in the time saving state is likely to be determined. It is possible to prevent the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol from decreasing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a condition for ending the time saving state, an ending condition that the number of small hits based on the variable display of the second special symbol is 2 is also set. As a small hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol, as described above, the first small hit that is a big hit game state of substantially 10 rounds at the time of V winning, and the second small win that is a big hit game state of substantially 5 rounds at the time of V winning. The hit and are provided. The type of small hit can be confirmed by the small hit pattern, but in the case of the second small hit in the time saving state, the V is dared to aim at the first small hit which is a more advantageous big hit game state. A game method such as avoiding winning can be selected. In order to make it difficult to select such a game method, in the present embodiment, as the condition for ending the time saving state, the ending condition that the number of small wins based on the variable display of the second special symbol is 2 is also set. .. Since the small hit based on the variable display of the first special symbol does not become the big hit via the small hit, it is not counted as the number of small hits in the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending due to the occurrence of a small hit which is not advantageous to the player. The number of small hits, which is the condition for ending the time saving state, is not limited to two, and may be one, three or more times (less than the number of times of change that is the condition for ending the time saving state). In addition, if a small hit with little merit for the player is not provided because it does not become a big hit via a small hit such as the third small hit, the number of occurrences of all the small hits is counted, and the time saving is performed according to the number. You can end the state.

  In addition, after the big hit without the symbol 5R, there is a shift to the normal state. In the following description, the three big hits of the symbol 5R with time saving and big hit, the small hit via 11 (10) R time with small hit, and the small hit via 6 (5) R with time saving and big hit may be referred to as the time saving and big hit.

  The hit type shown in FIG. 36-1 is an example, and in the feature portion 73AK, the first special symbol is set to be determined as a small hit, but the first special symbol is You may set up so that it may not be judged as a small hit. Further, the second special symbol is set to be determined as a big hit, but the second special symbol may be set not to be determined as a big hit. Also, the number of rounds of big hits, the number of types of hits, the end condition of the time saving state, and the like can be changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  Next, the operation of the characteristic unit 73AK will be described. FIG. 36-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation start process which is executed once at the start of fluctuation. The variation start process may be executed, for example, within the special symbol variation process (S303). The fluctuation start processing includes processing for subtracting and updating the hour / hour count counter and managing the hour / hour flag at the start of fluctuation.

  In the fluctuation start process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step 73AKS001). If the time saving flag is not set (step 73AKS001; No), the fluctuation start time process is terminated.

  If the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS001; Yes), the total time saving counter is updated by subtracting -1 (step 73AKS002).

  The total time saving counter is a counting means for counting the variation display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the time saving state is controlled after the jackpot game is over. The total time saving counter is set to 5 times in the big hit ending process when it is controlled to the time saving state after the 5R symbol time saving and big hit, and is set to 11 times when it is controlled to the time saving state after the time reduction and big hit via small hit. By step 73AKS002, the subtraction update is performed each time the variable display is executed once.

  Next, based on checking whether or not the special symbol pointer is data indicating “second”, it is determined whether or not it is the start time of the variable display of the second special symbol (step 73S003). When it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (step 73AKS003; Yes), the special figure 2 hour reduction counter is updated by subtracting -1 (step 73AKS004).

  Special figure 2 time saving number counter is the counting means which counts the variable display number of the second special symbol when it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game. Special figure 2 hour and hour counter, in the big hit end processing, is set to 1 when it is controlled to the time saving state after the 5R symbol time and big hit, and to 7 times when it is controlled to the time saving state after the hour and big hit through the small hit. It is set, and by step 73AKS004, the subtraction update is performed every time the variable display of the second special symbol is executed once.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the count value of the special figure 2 hour reduction counter has become "0" (step 73AKS005). Special figure 2 If the count value of the hour / hour counter is not "0" (step 73AKS005; No), or when it is the start of variable display of the first special symbol (step 73AKS003; No), the total number of hour / hour reductions It is determined whether or not the count value of the counter has become "0" (step 73AKS006). When the count value of the total time reduction counter is not "0" (step 73AKS006; No), the fluctuation start time process is terminated.

  Special figure 2 When the count value of the hour / hour counter is "0" (step 73AKS005; Yes) or when the count value of the total hour / hour counter is "0" (step 73AKS006; Yes), the hour / hour flag Is reset (step 73AKS007), and the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS008). After that, the fluctuation start processing is ended.

  In this embodiment, the hour / hour count counter is decremented and updated at the start of variation, and the final variation in the time-saving state (time-wise final variation) resets the hour / hour flag at the start of variation. However, when the time saving flag is reset, the time saving state (high base control) does not end immediately, but the time saving extension flag is set until the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value. The time saving state (high base control) continues while the time saving extension flag is set. As described above, in this embodiment, since the time saving flag is reset at a fixed timing (at the time of final time saving change), the control for resetting the time saving flag becomes easy, and the behavior can be stabilized. It should be noted that during the final change of the time saving, the time saving state is determined and managed by the time saving extension flag.

  In addition, the time saving flag and the time saving extension flag are normally referred to in the symbol process processing, and when either one is turned on, the high base control in the ordinary symbol process processing (control for increasing the probability that the stopped symbol of the ordinary symbol becomes a winning symbol, etc.) ) Is executed. When the time saving flag and the time saving extension flag are turned off, the high base control in the normal symbol process processing ends, and the time saving state ends.

  FIG. 36-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving end determination processing. The time saving end determination process is a process for determining whether or not the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied during the change, and is a process for ending the time saving state when the end condition is satisfied, and is repeated in the special symbol changing process (S303). Executed.

  In the time saving end determination processing, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS011). If the time saving extension flag is not set (step 73AKS011; No), the fluctuation start time process is terminated.

  If the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the second reserved storage number). It is determined whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step 73AKS012). If the second number of reserved storages has not reached the upper limit value (step 73AKS012; No), the time saving end determination processing ends.

  In the final time saving change in which the time saving extension flag is set, when the second number of pending storages reaches the upper limit value (step 73AKS012; Yes), the condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied, and the time saving extension flag is reset (step 73AKS013). A process for transmitting the normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS014), and the time saving end determination process ends.

  In the above embodiment, the special symbol stop process (FIG. 13) includes the process of subtracting and updating the hour / hour counter and resetting the hour / hour flag. In the characteristic portion 73AK, by the processing shown in FIGS. 36-4 and 36-5, the hour / hour counter is subtracted and updated, and the processing for managing the hour / hour flag and the hour / hour extension flag is executed. Processing is not executed. Further, in the characteristic part 73AK, the number of small hits in the time saving state is also a condition for ending the time saving state, so a process for ending the time saving state is also executed in the special symbol stop process based on the number of small hits. ..

  FIG. 36-6 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing related to the characteristic portion 73AK. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 36-6, the same step as the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. In the special symbol stop processing related to the characteristic portion 73AK, when the big hit flag is set (step S133; Yes), the CPU 56 resets the flag when the time saving flag or the time saving extension flag is set (step AKS030). ).

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S133; No), it is determined whether or not the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS027). If the time saving extension flag is not set (step 73AKS027; No), the process proceeds to step S139. If the time saving extension flag is set (step 73AKS027; Yes), the time saving extension flag is reset (step 73AKS028) because the display result is a loss or a small hit at the end of the time saving final change, and the normal state designation command is issued. The process for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS029), and the process proceeds to step S139.

  When the small hit flag is set in step S139 (step S139; Yes), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS021).

  If the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether the small hit type is the third small hit (step 73AKS022). If the time saving flag is not set (step 73AKS021; No), or if the small hit type is the third small hit (step 73AKS022; Yes), the process proceeds to step S140.

  If the small hit type is not the third small hit (step 73AKS022; No), that is, if the small hit type is the first small hit or the second small hit that is generated based on the variation of the second special symbol, the number of small hits The counter is updated by subtracting -1 (step 73AKS023). The small hit number counter is a counter for counting the number of first small hits or second small hits in the time saving state, and when controlled to the time saving state, the initial value is "2" (second special symbol The value corresponding to the end condition that the number of small hits based on the variable display is 2 is set.

  After that, it is determined whether or not the small hit number counter is "0" (step 73AKS024), and when the small hit number counter is "0" (step 73AKS024; Yes), the time saving flag is reset (step 73AKS025). ), The process for transmitting the normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is executed (step 73AKS026), and the process proceeds to step S140. If the small hit number counter is not "0" (step 73AKS024; No), the process proceeds to step S140.

  If the small hit flag is not set (step S139; No), the process proceeds to step S152.

  In the characteristic part 73AK, by performing such special symbol stop processing, control for ending the time saving state based on the number of small hits, or the case where the second reserved storage number is not the upper limit at the end of the time saving final fluctuation However, the control for ending the time saving state can be executed.

  In particular, in the time saving final fluctuation, even if the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied because the second pending storage number does not reach the upper limit, the time saving extension flag is turned off at the end of the time saving final variation, so that the time saving state is surely maintained. It can be finished and the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

  FIG. 36-7 shows an example of the effect operation in the time saving final variation of the characteristic portion 73AK. FIG. 36-7 (A) shows the effect display device 9 in which the variable display is executed and the right-handed image 73AK012 is displayed. The effect display device 9 is provided with a second hold display area 73AK002 indicating the second hold storage number, and FIG. 36-7 (A) shows that the second hold storage number is 2. In the time saving final change, when the second number of reserved memories is 2 (when it is not the upper limit number), for example, at the execution timing of the winning promotion notification, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (B), the effect display device 9 is displayed. The prize promotion image 73AK013 “Reserve hold!” Is displayed, and the prize promotion notification for blinking the second hold display area 73AK002 is executed. When the second number of reserved storages reaches 4, which is the upper limit number, for example, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C), the effect display device 9 indicates “charge completed” indicating that the number of second reserved storages has accumulated. The character image 73AK014 is displayed. At this time, the time saving state (high base control) is also ended. After that, for example, after the reach is executed, the time saving final variation ends as shown in FIG. 36-7 (D). In addition, in the time saving final variation, a variation pattern having a long variation time (for example, a variation pattern involving reach) may be selected or may be easily selected in order to easily store the reserved information of the second special symbol. In addition, the time saving final fluctuation may be made to be difficult for the variable winning ball apparatus 15 to be in the open state during the fluctuation after the time saving state ends by lengthening the stop time of the symbol or the interval until the time fluctuation.

  After that, after the end of the time saving state, the variable display of the second special symbol for the accumulated second reserved memory number is executed. Here, after the end of the time saving state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed four times for the upper limit number of the second reserved storage number. Then, if all of them are lost, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (E), the number of consecutive chans after the shift to the time saving state, the total number of coins won, etc. are displayed, and the state advantageous for the player is finished. Is shown. Even after the end of the time saving state, if the small hit occurs at about 1/7, the right hit is performed, so the right hit image 73AK015 with only the arrow is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to show the player a proper playing method.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (F), an arrow image 73AK016 for notifying that the player will play the game by left-handing is displayed.

  It should be noted that the winning promotion notification, the display showing that the second reserved memory number has accumulated, the right-handed display, the display of the number of consecutive chans, the total number of coins earned, etc. shown in FIG. In the above, the control for ending the time saving state may be executed when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit number, and the effect mode during variable display may be arbitrary.

  FIG. 36-8 is a timing chart until the end of the time saving state. Timings t1 to t4 in FIG. 36-8 correspond to timings t1 to t4 in FIG. 36-7. As shown in FIG. 36-8, at the timing t1 which is the start timing of the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving flag is reset to OFF and the time saving extension flag is set to ON. After that, at the timing t2, when the second number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit number, the time saving extension flag is reset to OFF, and the time saving state (high base control) ends. Then, after the end of the time saving final variation at the timing t3, the variation display of the second special symbols for the second number of reserved memories is executed.

  During the time saving state, and while the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the number of the second reserved memory accumulated after the time saving is executed, the hole management is performed from the main board (game control board) 31 by the information output process of step S29. A time saving signal is output to the outside of the gaming machine such as a computer for use. Further, at this time, a right-handed LED (right-handed lamp) provided at a predetermined position of the game board 6 or the like, which indicates a right-handed state, is turned on. At the timing t4, when the variable display of the second special symbols corresponding to the second reserved memory number is finished, the time saving medium signal and the right hitting LED are turned off. By doing so, it is possible to suitably grasp the number of consecutive chan and the number of balls thrown by the external device. In addition, the player can be notified of an appropriate game method. The timing of outputting the time saving signal to the outside is a right-handing command output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 (a command indicating that it is in a time saving state, or during the holding of the second special symbol after the end of the time saving state) It may be synchronized with the output timing of a command indicating that there is).

(Modification of the characteristic part 73AK)
The present characteristic portion is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further characteristic features may be added. Further, all of the configurations described in the above embodiments are not essential configurations, and some of them may be omitted. Further, this feature part and other feature parts may be appropriately combined.

  In the above-described embodiment, the time saving flag is reset at the start of the time saving final variation, and the time saving extension flag is set to control whether or not the time saving final flag is in the time saving state in the time saving final variation. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to manage whether or not the time saving state is based on only the time saving flag without providing the time saving extension flag. In this case, the time saving flag is reset when the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied in the final time saving variation, and the time saving state is ended.

  FIG. 36-9 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving end determination processing in the modified example in which the time saving extension flag is not provided. In the time saving end determination process, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS101). If the time saving flag is not set (step 73AKS101; No), the fluctuation start time process is ended.

  If the time saving flag is set (step 73AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not the final fluctuation is in the time saving state (73AKS102 to 73AKS104).

  First, it is determined whether or not the variable display this time is the variable display of the second special symbol (73AKS102), and if it is the variable display of the second special symbol (73AKS102; Yes), the special figure 2 hour reduction counter It is determined whether or not the count value of is 1 (73AKS103). Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is not displayed (73AKS103; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the total time saving counter is "1" (73AKS104).

  Special figure 2 When the count value of the hour / hour counter is "1" (73AKS103; Yes) or when the count value of the total hour / hour counter is "1" (73AKS104; Yes), the current fluctuation display is the hour Since it is the final change in the state, whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 4). Whether or not) is determined (step 73AKS105). If the second number of reserved storages has not reached the upper limit value (step 73AKS105; No), the time saving end determination processing ends.

  When the second number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit value in the time saving final fluctuation (step 73AKS105; Yes), the end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, the time saving flag is reset (step 73AKS106), and the normal state designation command is controlled. The processing for transmitting to the microcomputer 100 for use is executed (step 73AKS107), and the time saving end determination processing is ended.

  In this modification, the variation start process shown in FIG. 36-4 is not executed in step S303, and in step S304, the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 13 is added to the processes of steps 73AKS021 to 73AKS026 (second special). A special symbol stop process is executed in which a process of ending the time saving state according to the number of small hits based on the variable display of the symbols is added.

  According to this modification, it is not necessary to provide a new flag such as a time saving extension flag, and the time saving state can be ended when the second reserved storage number reaches the upper limit number in the time saving final variation.

  In the above-described embodiment, the time saving state (high base control) is ended when the second number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit number in the final saving of time saving, but the second number of pending storages is changed in the final variation of time saving. It is also possible to end the time saving state based on the fact that the number becomes less than the upper limit number by a predetermined number (for example, 3). Further, the time saving state may not be ended immediately when the second reserved storage number becomes a predetermined number less than the upper limit number in the final time saving change, but may be ended after a predetermined grace time has elapsed. Further, the time saving state may be ended based on the fact that the second reserved storage number increased in the time saving final variation reaches a specific number (for example, 2).

  Further, even if the second pending storage number does not reach the upper limit number in the time saving final change, the time saving state may be ended at a timing before a predetermined period before the end of the change.

  It should be noted that the control for ending the time saving state on the basis of the second reserved memory number having reached the upper limit number (predetermined number) in the time saving final variation is not limited to the control of the above-described embodiment and modification, and may be any control. May be realized by

  In addition, in the time saving final fluctuation, the second pending storage information may be prefetched, and the ending condition of the time saving state may be changed depending on whether there is an advantageous display result (small hit or big hit). .. For example, if there is no advantageous display result for the second pending storage information in the time saving final fluctuation, the time saving state is ended based on the fact that the second pending storage number reaches the upper limit number, and the second pending storage information is reached. If there is a display result that is advantageous to, the time saving state may be terminated based on the fact that the second reserved storage number has become a predetermined number less than the upper limit number. By doing so, it is possible to execute high base control according to the game situation.

  Based on the game ball winning the variable winning ball device (ordinary electric prize), the non-electric prize is released and the game ball can be won at the first start prize hole and the second start prize hole. The invention relating to the characteristic portion 73AK may be applied to the gaming machine. When the non-electrical accessory is opened, it remains open until a prescribed number (for example, 2) of game balls are won. In such a gaming machine, when the time saving state (high base control) is ended at the end timing of the time saving final fluctuation, the non-electric accessory (the second start winning a prize winning opening is set in the time saving final fluctuation while keeping the second reserved memory number at the upper limit. ) Ends the time saving state in the opened state, and after the time saving state ends, the variable display of the second special symbol for the accumulated second reserved memory is executed, and then the opened non-electric accessory (the first It is possible to win a specified number of game balls to the (2 start prize hole). Therefore, even in a pachinko gaming machine equipped with such a non-electric accessory, the variable winning ball device can be achieved by terminating the time saving state (high base control) at the timing when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit due to the time saving final fluctuation. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls to be won in (ordinary electric accessory), and it is difficult to end the time saving state with the non-electric accessory (second start winning port) opened while the second reserved memory number is the upper limit. Can be

(Explanation of means relating to the characteristic part 73AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 73AK is
The first variable display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 8a) and the second variable display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 8b) are capable of performing variable display (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to 73AK). ), And
The variable display on the second variable display means is more likely to be advantageous to the player than the variable display on the first variable display means (eg, FIG. 36-1, FIG. 36-2),
A variable winning device that changes from a closed state to an open state in which the game medium is easier to win than the closed state based on that the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol is a predetermined result (for example, the normal symbol is a hit) (for example, Variable winning ball device 15),
Hold storage means (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second variable display means as second hold information based on the entry of the game medium into the variable winning device.
Special state control means (for example, CPU 56 that executes the process of step S170) capable of controlling the special state (for example, a time saving state, a high base state) in which the variable winning device is more likely to be opened than in the normal state;
A special state ending means for ending the special state based on the number of executions of the variable display in the special state (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS013, step 73AKS028, step 73AKS106),
The special state ending means is provided on condition that the number of the second holding information stored in the holding storage means has reached a predetermined number (for example, 4 which is an upper limit number) in the variable display of the last time in the special state. The special state can be terminated (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processes of step 73AKS012, step 73AKS013, step 73AKS105, and step 73AKS106).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means, which is advantageous in the number of times larger than the upper limit number of the second hold information after the special state ends, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the number of the second holding information stored in the holding storage means does not reach the predetermined number in the final variable display in the special state, the special state ending unit is configured to perform the special display at the end of the variable display. The state may be ended (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS028 and step S149).
With such a configuration, fairness of the game can be ensured.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
When the special state is controlled, the first flag (for example, a time saving flag) is turned on, and in the final variable display in the special state, the first flag is turned off and the second flag is set when the variable display is started. (For example, a time saving extension flag) is turned on, and the second flag is turned off when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS012 and step 73AKS013).
The special state ending means may end the special state when the second flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means, which is advantageous in the number of times larger than the upper limit number of the second hold information after the special state ends, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (2) above,
A flag management that turns on a first flag (for example, a time saving flag) when controlled to the special state, and turns off the first flag when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the final variable display in the special state. Means (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the processing of step 73AKS105 and step 73AKS106),
The special state ending means may end the special state when the first flag is turned off.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable display from being executed by the second variable display means, which is advantageous in the number of times larger than the upper limit number of the second hold information after the special state ends, and to ensure the fairness of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the small hit game state is controlled on the basis of the variable display on the second variable display means, rather than when the small hit game state is controlled on the basis of the variable display on the first variable display means, Tends to be advantageous to the player (for example, FIGS. 36-1 and 36-2),
The special state ending means,
The number of times of variable display in the special state is counted, and the special state can be ended when the number of times of variable display in the special state reaches the first number (for example, processing of step 73AKS007, step 73AKS028, step S149. With)
The number of the small hit game states in the special state is counted, and the special state can be ended when the number of the small hit game states in the special state reaches the second number (for example, processing of step 73AKS025). Run),
As the number of times of variable display in the special state, the number of times of variable display in the first variable display means and the second variable display means is counted (for example, the processing of step 73AKS002 and step S143 is executed),
As the number of the small hitting game states in the special state, only the number of the small hitting game states based on the variable display on the second variable display means is counted, and the small number based on the variable display on the first variable display means is counted. The winning gaming state may not be counted (for example, the processes of step 73AKS022 and step 73AKS023 are executed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably control the special state.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
An external signal sending unit (for example, the CPU 56 that executes the process of S29) that sends out a signal (for example, a time saving signal) indicating the special state to the outside is provided.
The external signal transmitting means may be capable of transmitting a signal indicating the special state for a predetermined period even after the end of the special state (for example, FIG. 36-8).
With such a configuration, it is possible for the external device to preferably recognize the continuous advantageous state.

[Other modifications]
Next, other modifications and characteristic points will be listed below.

  (1) In the above-described embodiment, various selection decisions by lottery for executing the effect pattern of the number-of-rounds suggestion effect may be executed at the start of fluctuation of the variable display that is a small hit, and the small hit game state and You may execute it when it becomes.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, as the number-of-rounds suggestive effect, an example in which the effect mode of the V winning aura image 95 is changed every time the game ball enters in accordance with a predetermined effect pattern is shown. However, not limited to this, it is determined by a lottery whether or not the presentation mode (for example, color) of the V winning aura image 95 is changed each time the game ball enters, and the V winning aura image is determined based on the lottery result. You may make it change the presentation mode of 95. In that case, it is possible to determine whether or not to change the color and to select and change the color to be changed for each detection of the entry of the game ball, and to make sure that the color is changed each time the entry of the game ball is detected. Alternatively, the color to be changed may be selected and determined.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which, when the V winning aura image 95 becomes iridescent in the round number suggesting effect, it is determined that the 16 (15) R hour-hours jackpot is achieved. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the 16 (15) R hour / hour jackpot and the pending storage information for the pending series are present, the V winning aura image 95 may be rendered in a rainbow color. In addition, when there is a 5 (4) R hour / hour jackpot and there is pending storage information that is a pending string, the V winning aura image 95 may be rendered in a rainbow color.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the color of the V winning aura image 95 can be changed is executed in the round number suggesting effect as the predetermined effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the number-of-rounds suggesting effect, an effect in which the V winning image 94 changes from the “v” shape to the “W” shape may be executed. In that case, the color of the V winning aura image 95 may be changed as in the case described above.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state described as an advantageous state is a representative example of the jackpot gaming state in which the variable winning means is opened a plurality of times.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, as the round suggestion effect, an example in which the color of the V winning aura image 95 is changed in association with the V winning image 94 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. A V-winning aura image may be displayed as a non-accompanying image (for example, an aura-shaped effect image may be displayed at a position distant from the V-winning image 94), and the effect of changing the color may be displayed. Further, whether or not to execute the effect of changing the color of the V-winning aura image 95 accompanying the V-winning image 94 is determined by a predetermined lottery, and may not be executed. ..

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the total of the number of holding stations for the symbol big hit and the number of holding stations for the small hit can be specified as "+ 3BONUS" as the held consecutive notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be such that each of the number of holding stations for the symbol big hit and the number of holding stations for the small hit can be individually specified.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the effect data when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10 is not provided as an effect pattern when executing the round number suggesting effect. Not limited to this, effect data may be provided when the number of game balls entering the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10. For example, if the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10, the color may be the same as the color of the 10th ball, and so on. In this way, even when the number of game balls that have entered the V determination winning device 87 exceeds 10, it is possible to execute the round number suggesting effect without causing a feeling of strangeness.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, the contents of the second holding storage information existing when the big hit game state occurs are prefetched, and the holding storage information that becomes the “symbol big hit” and the holding storage information that becomes the “small hit” An example in which the pending continuous notification effect is executed when either of the above is present is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold continuous notification effect may be executed only when there is hold storage information that is a “small hit”. The holding continuous notification effect may be executed only when there is held storage information that is a “symbol big hit”.

  (10) In the embodiment described above, in the second hold storage information that exists when the big hit game state occurs, when there is hold storage information that is a "symbol big hit", and when there is a hold storage information that is a "small hit" In each of the cases where there is a case, an example in which the held continuous notification effect of the same effect mode is executed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous holding notification effect of different effect modes may be executed depending on whether there is the pending storage information that is a “symbol big hit” and when there is the pending storage information that is a “small hit”.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, regardless of the total number of "symbol big hits" and "small hits" in the second pending storage information existing when the big hit game state occurs, the same The holding continuous notification effect of the effect mode may be executed, or the pending continuous notification effect of a different effect mode may be executed according to the total number.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, in the second pending storage information that exists when the big hit game state occurs, there is only a “symbol big hit”, a case where there is only a “small hit”, and a “symbol big hit”. And the case where both of the small hits are present ", the same continuous hold notification effect may be executed, and depending on these cases, different continuous hold notification effects may be executed.

  (13) The read-ahead of the second hold storage information for executing the holding continuous notification effect may be executed at the start of the variable display of the small hit or the big hit, or may be executed during the small hit game state, It may be executed during the big hit game state.

  (14) The V lamp effect executed as the above-mentioned holding continuous notification effect may not be an effect capable of notifying the number of reserved stations, but may be an effect capable of notifying the number of reserved stations. In the case of an effect capable of informing the number of holding stations, in the V lamp effect, the relationship between the number of holding stations and the emission color of the lamp is determined in advance, and based on the relationship, the number of holding stations is determined by the emission color of the lamp. Notification may be possible.

  (15) With regard to “big hits via small hits”, instead of selecting and determining the type of big hits when it is determined as small hits, when a V winning occurs, a plurality of control patterns such as the number of rounds of big hits are set. You may make it select from a control pattern of a kind.

  (16) The arrangement of structures such as the variable winning ball device 15, the V determination winning device 87, and the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 shown in the above-described embodiment is an example, and the following different arrangements may be adopted. May be adopted. For example, the jackpot variable winning ball device 20 may be provided in the right game area. Further, a V winning area is provided inside the big hit variable winning ball device 20, and the big hit variable winning ball device 20 includes one variable winning ball device for big hit and one variable winning ball device for small hit. The device may also be used in common.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, when a game ball is won in the V prize area of the V determination prize device 87, a big hit game state is entered and only the big hit variable prize ball device 20 is opened. Not limited to this, in the jackpot gaming state, the V determination winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening mode, or only the V determination winning device 87 may be opened in a predetermined opening mode. ..

  (18) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the V determination winning device 87 is always opened when the game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. Not limited to this, when the game ball is won in the variable winning ball device 15 when the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, it is determined whether or not to open the game ball based on a specific lottery, and the lottery result to be the open state. When it becomes, the V determination winning device 87 may be opened.

  (19) In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the game ball is controlled to the big hit game state when the game ball wins the V prize area in the V determination winning device 87 in the small hit game state has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. You may make it perform the operation | movement of such a game state by control of the big hit game state in which the same operation | movement as a game state is performed. For example, the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened in the first round, and the big-hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. When it is decided to execute such a big hit game control by the big hit judgment, such a big hit game state is started, and the V judgment winning device 87 is opened as the control of the first round of the big hit game state. By making it appear as a small hit game state, when the game ball makes a V prize in the V prize area 870 in the first round, the big hit variable prize ball device 20 is opened by continuing the big hit game state, the second round. The subsequent round control is executed to make it look like a big hit game state. On the other hand, in the first round of the big hit game state, when the game ball does not win the V winning area 870 in the V determination prize winning device 87, the big hit game state is not continued in the second and subsequent rounds, but in the first round. Execute control to end.

  (20) The advantageous state that is advantageous to the player may include various advantageous states such as a big hit game state, a time saving state, and a high base state. In a gaming machine in which the jackpot determination probability can be controlled from a low-probability state to a high-probability state (probability change state), the high-probability state is also included in the advantageous state. In this embodiment, a more specific advantageous state is that the big hit variable winning ball device 20 is opened in the big hit game state.

  (21) As the specific effect, the number of reach lines is increased (may be decreased display) in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second hold storage information), but the following effect is performed. May be For example, a predetermined icon image corresponding to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (increase in the number of second stored information items) (for example, a star-shaped image with a character "RUSH" that is associated with a state advantageous to the player). The number may be increased (decrease may be displayed). In addition, the number of predetermined character images (for example, a special character image that is not displayed in other effects) may be increased (decrease may be displayed) according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (increase in the second hold storage information). It may be. In addition, a numerical image that counts down from the upper limit value (4) of the second reserved storage information number may be displayed according to the satisfaction of a predetermined condition (increase of the second reserved storage information number), and the current second reserved storage information may be displayed. A numerical image that counts up from the number of information (for example, 0) to the upper limit value (4) may be displayed. In this way, the specific effect may be an effect of any effect mode.

  (22) As the change effect, any effect may be used as long as it is an effect that changes the effect mode of the specific effect in accordance with the increase in the number of the second hold storage information. For example, any effect may be used as long as the change of the effect mode in the various effects described above is executed in accordance with the increase in the number of the second hold storage information.

  (23) The change effect is to change the effect mode in which the number of reach lines is increased according to the number of pieces of second stored information, but the reach symbol is a reach symbol using a symbol other than the “7” symbol. It may be. As such a reach symbol, a symbol other than the symbol included in the symbol string used for the normal variable display, for example, a symbol such as "RUSH" in which a character associated with the advantageous state for the player is shown is special. You may use a design.

  (24) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine that pays out the game medium to the player in accordance with the occurrence of the prize has been described. However, the game medium is enclosed, and the game medium is paid to the player in accordance with the occurrence of the prize. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which is an example of a game medium, inside the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing the game points, so that a ball lending operation can be performed. Accordingly, the game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the shooting operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning. Although the gaming machine which pays out the game medium to the player's hand in accordance with the occurrence of the prize has been described, the game medium is enclosed and the game point is not paid out to the player in accordance with the occurrence of the prize ( An enclosed game machine that adds points) may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of game balls, which is an example of a game medium, inside the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing the game points, so that a ball lending operation can be performed. Accordingly, the game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the shooting operation of the game ball, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of the winning.

  (25) In the present embodiment, the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is exemplified, but the “ratio (ratio, probability)” is not limited to this, and is, for example, a value within the range of 0% to 100%. Of these, a value including 0%, a value including 100%, and a value not including 0% and 100% may be used.

  (26) The gaming state that is advantageous to the player is a jackpot gaming state, a time saving state, a high base state, and a state in which the gaming state after the jackpot game has a high probability of being determined as a jackpot compared to the normal state. Any gaming state may be used as long as it is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, such as the probability change state.

  (27) In the above-described operation effect, the tilt direction sensor unit 123 capable of detecting the operation of the operation means operable by the player such as the stick controller 122 is used as the detection means capable of detecting the operation (action) of the player. Such detecting means is shown as an example. However, the detection means is not limited to this, and other detection means such as the push sensor 124 capable of detecting the operation of the push button 120 may be used as the detection means capable of detecting the operation of the player, and the operation of the operation means is detected. Instead of the means for detecting, a detecting means such as an infrared sensor and a motion sensor which can directly detect the motion of the player may be used.

  (28) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 1 pachinko gaming machine, 560
Microcomputer for game control, 55 RAM, 9 effect display device, 96 hour remaining count image.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of controlling to a special state after performing variable display on the first variable display means and the second variable display means,
For the player, the time when the special state is controlled based on the variable display on the second variable display means is more than the time when the special state is controlled on the basis of the variable display on the first variable display means. Easy to get an advantage,
Based on the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol is a predetermined result, a variable winning means for changing from the closed state to the open state where the game medium is easier to win than the closed state,
It is possible to control to a special state where the variable winning means is more likely to be in the open state than in the normal state,
Further comprising a special state ending means for ending the special state based on the number of executions of variable display in the special state,
The special state ending means,
The number of times of variable display in the special state is updated, and when the number of times of variable display in the special state becomes the first number of times, the special state can be ended,
Updating the number of times of the special state in the special state, and when the number of times of the special state in the special state becomes a second number, the special state can be ended,
As the number of variable displays in the special state, the number of variable displays in the first variable display means and the second variable display means is updated,
As the number of times of the special state in the special state, the second variable display means of the special state based on the variable display on the second variable display means and the special state based on the variable display on the first variable display means Updating the number of times of the special state based on the variable display in
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images